i
Vigor2926 Series Dual-WAN Security Router User’s Guide Version: 1.3 Firmware Version: V3.9.
Copyrights © All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders. Trademarks The following trademarks are used in this document: Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
iv Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents Part I Installation .................................................................................................................i I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1 I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 2 I-1-1-1 For Vigor2926 / Vigor2926L ........................................
II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) .......71 II-1-2-4 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in WAN3/WAN4................74 II-1-2-5 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in WAN3/WAN4..............76 II-1-2-6 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in LTE WAN ..................78 II-1-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 ....................80 II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in WAN1/WAN2 .....................................
II-5-3-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 165 II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose ....................................................................... 166 II-5-4 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 167 II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+ ........................................................................................................ 169 II-5-5-1 External RADIUS ............
II-7-3 Send SMS ...................................................................................................................... 247 II-7-4 Router Commands ......................................................................................................... 248 II-7-5 Status ............................................................................................................................. 250 Part III Wireless LAN..........................................................................
V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard ........................................................................................................ 326 V-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................. 330 V-1-4 PPP General Setup........................................................................................................ 331 V-1-5 IPsec General Setup ...........................................................................................
VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 428 VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile .......................................................................................................... 432 Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 434 A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor .................................................
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 516 A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management ................................... 516 A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature ....................................................... 525 VII-4 Hotspot Web Portal................................................................................................................ 529 Web User Interface ........................
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 609 A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2926) to check AP status and deploy WLAN profile ..................................................................................... 609 VII-7 Central Management (Switch) ............................................................................................... 612 Web User Interface .................................
VIII-2-3 File Explorer ................................................................................................................ 671 VIII-2-4 USB Device Status...................................................................................................... 672 VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................... 673 VIII-2-6 Modem Support List ...............................................................................
Part I Installation This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to install the device in hardware and software.
I-1 Introduction This is a generic International version of the user guide. Specification, compatibility and features vary by region. For specific user guides suitable for your region or product, please contact local distributor. Vigor2926 series integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first. I-1-1-1 For Vigor2926 / Vigor2926L LED ACT (Activity) WAN1~WAN2 QoS LTE Status Blinking Off On Off Blinking On Explanation The router is powered on and running normally. The router is powered off. Internet connection is ready. Internet connection is not ready. The data is transmitting. The QoS function is active. On Off SIM card is connected and running normally.
LED Off Switch on Rear Side Interface Factory Reset LAN1~LAN5 WAN1~WAN2 USB1~USB2 PWR ON/OFF SIM Card Slot The port is connected with 10/100Mbps (Jack for LTE device) Description Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration. Connecters for local network devices.
I-1-1-2 For Vigor2926n / Vigor2926ac / Vigor2926Lac / Vigor2926Ln LED ACT (Activity) WAN1~WAN2 QoS LTE Status Blinking Off On Off Blinking On Explanation The router is powered on and running normally. The router is powered off. Internet connection is ready. Internet connection is not ready. The data is transmitting. The QoS function is active. On Off SIM card is connected and running normally. LTE device is not detected or encounters troubles (e.g.
Blinking The data is transmitting. On Off Blinking On Off On Off Blinking On Off The port is connected. The port is disconnected. The data is transmitting. The port is connected with 1000Mbps. The port is connected with 10/100Mbps The port is connected. The port is disconnected. The data is transmitting. The port is connected with 1000Mbps. The port is connected with 10/100Mbps LED on Connector LAN1~ LAN4 Left LED Right LED WAN1 ~ WAN2 Left LED Right LED The port “P5 / WAN2” is switchable.
Switch on Rear Side Interface Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS Factory Reset 6 (Jack for LTE device) Description For Vigor2926n: Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the wireless function is ready, the green LED will be on. Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the LED will be off. For Vigor2926ac/Vigor2926Lac / Vigor2926Ln: Wireless band will be switched /changed according to the button pressed and released.
LAN1~LAN4 WAN1~WAN2 USB1~2 / USB PWR ON/OFF SIM Card Slot Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide default configuration. Connecters for local network devices. Connecter for local network devices or modem for accessing Internet. Connecter for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer or thermometer). Connecter for a power adapter. Power Switch. Connector for a SIM card.
I-1-1-3 For Vigor2926Vac LED ACT (Activity) WAN1~ WAN2 Line USB Phone1/Phone2 2.4G/5G Status Blinking Off On Off Blinking On Off On Blinking On Off Blinking On Blinking Explanation The router is powered on and running normally. The router is powered off. Internet connection is ready. Internet connection is not ready. The data is transmitting. A PSTN phone call comes (in and out). However, when the phone call is disconnected, the LED will be off. There is no PSTN phone call.
Interface Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS Phone 1/2 Line PWR Description Wireless band will be switched /changed according to the button pressed and released. For example, 2.4G (On) and 5G (On) – in default. 2.4G (Off) and 5G (On) – pressed and released the button once. 2.4G (On) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button twice. 2.4G (Off) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button three times.
I-1-2 Notes for Antenna Installation (for “L” model) Magnetic antenna must be installed on the extension base before connecting to Vigor router. Extension Base There are two mounting holes for installing antennas with extension base on Vigor router. Please install them as shown below. Major Signal Transmitted Hole SIM Card Slot Extension Base Note, if only one antenna shall be installed, please use the mounting hole (major signal transmitted hole) near to the SIM card slot.
While installing the SIM card into the card slot, note that back plate of the SIM card slot must be removed first and the direction of card notch must be on the left side. There are two types of antennas provided for Vigor2926Ln/Vigor2926Lac, which must be installed in different locations carefully and correctly. Wrong installation might cause bad signal of wireless connection. Therefore, pay attention to the installation of antennas by referring to the following illustration.
I-2 Hardware Installation I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly. In this section, Vigor2926n is taken as an example. 12 1. Connect the cable Modem/DSL Modem/Media Converter to any WAN port of router with Ethernet cable (RJ-45). 2. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to one of the LAN ports of the router and the other end of the cable (RJ-45) into the Ethernet port on your computer. 3.
I-2-2 Wall-Mounted Installation Vigor router has keyhole type mounting slots on the underside. 1. A template is provided on the Vigor router packaging box to enable you to space the screws correctly on the wall. 2. Place the template on the wall and drill the holes according to the recommended instruction. 3. Fit screws into the wall using the appropriate type of wall plug. Note 4. The recommended drill diameter shall be 6.5mm (1/4”).
I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7. For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com. Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers (or wireless clients). 14 1. Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port. 2.
4. A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next. 5. In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.
16 6. In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next. 7. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.
8. Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the selection, click Next. 9. Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.
10. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next. 11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.
12. The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new printer icon and click Printer server properties. 13. Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.
14. Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name. The printer can be used for printing now. Most of the printers with different manufacturers are compatible with vigor router. Info Some printers with the fax/scanning or other additional functions are not supported. Vigor router supports printing request from computers via LAN ports but not WAN port.
I-3 Accessing Web Page 1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly. You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later section - Trouble Shooting of the guide. 2. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. 3.
4. Now, the Main Screen will appear. Take Vigor2926ac as as example. Info 5. 22 The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the router you have. The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.
I-4 Changing Password Please change the password for the original security of the router. 1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will open to ask for username and password. 2. Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user interface with admin mode. 3. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password. 4. Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password.
is still “admin”.
I-5 Dashboard Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access, IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access. Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page. A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen.
I-5-1 Virtual Panel On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router) displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, WAN2, or LAN1 – LAN4, related web setting page will be open for you to configure if required. Port Color Description LED (left side) Black It means the router or the function is not working.
I-5-3 Status for LTE It is a short table which displays current status for Vigor2926L/Vigor2926Ln including acess mode used, access tech adopted, band usage, operator, strength of signal and notification of new SMS received. I-5-4 Quick Access for Common Used Menu All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be accessed in a quick way just for convenience.
Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor. Click it to review the LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor connection(s) used presently. Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in the field of Connected. All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port.
I-5-6 Web Console It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user interface. Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.
30 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-5-7 Config Backup There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup. Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen and a pop up dialog will appear. Click Save to store the setting. I-5-8 Logout Click this icon to exit the web user interface.
I-5-9 Online Status I-5-9-1 Physical Connection Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN connection status, ADSL information, and so on.
Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below: Item Description LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for WAN interface. Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address for WAN interface. IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface. TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface. RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.
Item Description TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the WAN interface. TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the WAN interface. RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets at the WAN interface. RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN interface. Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below: Item Description LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..
I-6 Quick Start Wizard Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. Go to Wizards>>Quick Start Wizard. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login password. After typing the password, please click Next. On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface that you use. If Ethernet interface is used, please choose WAN1/WAN2; if 3G/4G USB modem is used, please choose WAN3/WAN4; if LTE SIM card is used, please choose LTE..
I-6-1 For WAN1/WAN2 (Ethernet) WAN1/WAN2 is dedicated to physical mode in Ethernet. If you choose WAN1/WAN2, please specify physical type. Then, click Next. On the next page as shown below, please select the appropriate Internet access type according to the information from your ISP. For example, you should select PPPoE mode if the ISP provides you PPPoE interface. Then click Next for next step. PPPoE 1. 36 Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button.
2. Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Service Name (Optional) Enter the description of the specific network service. Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP. Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters. Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP. Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.
38 3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
PPTP/L2TP 1. Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click PPTP/L2TP as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP. Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters. Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
characters. 40 Confirm Password Retype the password. WAN IP Configuration Obtain an IP address automatically – the router will get an IP address automatically from DHCP server. Specify an IP address – you have to type relational settings manually. IP Address - Type the IP address. Subnet Mask –Type the subnet mask. Gateway – Type the IP address of the gateway. Primary DNS / Second DNS – Type the IP address of the DNS server. PPTP Server / L2TP Server Type the IP address of the server.
Static IP 1. Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click Static IP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description WAN IP Type the IP address. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask. Gateway Type the IP address of gateway. Primary DNS Type in the primary IP address for the router.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. 3. Please type in the IP address information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for next step. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet. DHCP 42 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Host Name Type the name of the host. Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is 39 characters. MAC Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter the MAC address. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet. I-6-2 For WAN3/WAN4 (USB) WAN3/WAN4 is dedicated to physical mode in USB. 1. Choose WAN3/WAN4 as WAN Interface. 2. Then, click Next for getting the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 44 Item Description Internet Access Choose one of the selections as the protocol of accessing the internet.
3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the pin code you can set is 15 characters. Modem Initial String – Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP. The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters. APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.
I-6-3 For LTE WAN 1. Choose LTE as WAN Interface. 2. Then, click Next for getting the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 46 Item Description Internet Access Now, DHCP mode is the only choice for LTE WAN. 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) SIM Pin code – Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here.
3. Please type in required information originally provided by your ISP. Then, click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
I-7 Service Activation Wizard Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin operation, therefore, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging into the web user interface. Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Info BPjM is web content filter (WCF) for German Speaking users. It is ideal for your family to provide more Internet security for youngsters. Cryan 30-day trial is WCF which offers 30-day trial period. After trial, you can purchase DrayTek's prepared Cryan GlobalView WCF package from retailing outlets. DT-APPE, developed by DrayTek, offers a mechanism to upgrade APPE signature automatically. DT-DDNS, developed by DrayTek, offers one year free charge service of dynamic DNS service for internal use.
3. Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Activate. Info 4. 50 The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in Firewall>>General Setup. Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.
I-8 Registering Vigor Router You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration. 1 Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as User Name / Password. 2 Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.
Info 52 If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account. 4 The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for the router, then click Add. 5 When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the database. 6 After clicking OK, you will see the following page.
Part II Connectivity It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in WAN. It means local area network. Private IP will be used in LAN. Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.
II-1 WAN It allows users to access Internet. Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre (NIC).
After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the third WAN port. However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3 also can be used as backup device. Therefore, when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically. The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.
Web User Interface II-1-1 General Setup This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection modes for WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 (or LTE) and WAN4 in details. This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Load Balance Mode This option is available for multiple-WAN for getting enough bandwidth for each WAN port. If you know the practical bandwidth for your WAN interface, please choose the setting of According to Line Speed. Otherwise, please choose Auto Weight to let the router reach the best load balance. IP Based - The same source / destination IP pair will select the same WAN interface as policy. It is the default setting.
II-1-1-1 WAN1/WAN2 with Ethernet WAN1/WAN2 is fixed with physical mode of Ethernet. Available settings are explained as follows: 58 Item Description Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface. Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface. Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface. When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status. Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection. Active When WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN will be activated as the main network connection.
II-1-1-2 WAN3/WAN4 (USB) To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3 or WAN4 interface. Or (LTE model) Available settings are explained as follows: 60 Item Description Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface. Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface. Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
Active Mode Choose Always On to make the WAN2 connection being activated always. Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface. When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status. Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection.
II-1-2 Internet Access For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4) for Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for WAN interface, the Access Mode for these connections also varies. Refer to the following figures for examples.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Display the WAN interface. Display Name It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 that entered in general setup. Physical Mode It shows the physical connection for WAN1/WAN2 (Ethernet) /WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 (USB) according to the real network connection. Access Mode Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The details page of that mode will be popped up.
Enable/Disable – Enable/Disable the function of DHCP Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number with data. For example, Option number:100 Data: abcd When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets. Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be overwritten by such function. WAN5 ~ WAN7 can be located under WAN>>Multi-PVC/VLAN. Option Number – Type a number for such function.
II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) To use PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPPoE tab. The following web page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.
transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server. Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction. For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet. For Wireless LAN – It is available for n model. If you check this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU. PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP. Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action. IP Assignment (IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request.
II-1-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address to the WAN interface.
Router Name: Type in the router name provided by ISP. Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you have assigned. Enable DHCP Client Identifier: Check the box to specify username and password as the DHCP client identifier for some ISP. Username: Type a name as username. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters. Password: Type a password. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.
70 Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them. II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP/L2TP tab. The following web page will be shown.
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page. Schedule Profile Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work. MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
IP Address – Type the IP address. Subnet Mask – Type the subnet mask. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-1-2-4 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in WAN3/WAN4 To use 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) for WAN3. The following web page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: 74 Item Description Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router. 3G /4G USB Modem (PPP mode) Click Enable for activating this function.
characters. Modem Initial String Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP. The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters. APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply. The maximum length of the name you can set is 43 characters. Modem Initial String2 The initial string 1 is shared with APN.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them. II-1-2-5 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in WAN3/WAN4 To use 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) for WAN3/WAN4. The following web page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: 76 Item Description Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router.
characters. Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically. APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply. The maximum length of the name you can set is 47 characters.
Authentication After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically. Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU. Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP authentication. Username – Type the username for authentication (optional). Password – Type the password for authentication (optional).
adjusted in this page will be invalid. SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19 characters. Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically. APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs.
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically. Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value. Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU. LTE hardware version The hardware version of the embedded LTE module.
II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in WAN1/WAN2 During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of the generated prefix. No need to type any other information for PPP mode.
Info At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK. II-1-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6 network easily. Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago (http://gogonet.gogo6.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Username Type the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password for http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account. The maximum length of the name you can set is 63 characters. Password Type the password assigned with the user name. The maximum length of the name you can set is 19 characters. Tunnel Broker Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.
II-1-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Available settings are explained as follows: 84 Item Description Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always. Username Type the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password. The maximum length of the name you can set is 19 characters. Password Type the password assigned with the user name.
WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging. TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value. After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
II-1-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in WAN1/WAN2 DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description IAID Type a number as IAID. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.
II-1-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in WAN1/WAN2 This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Static IPv6 Address configuration IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 Static IP Address. Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length. Add – Click it to add a new entry. Update – Click it to modify an existed entry. Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging. TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value. Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem. Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is enabled.
II-1-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in WAN1/WAN2 This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface. Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network. However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address Type the static IPv4 address for the remote server.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode. II-1-2-14 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in WAN1/WAN2 This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface. Available settings are explained as follows: 90 Item Description 6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP". Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.
IPv4 Border Relay Type the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given 6rd domain. IPv4 Mask Length Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across all CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain. It may be any value between 0 and 32. 6rd Prefix Type the 6rd IPv6 address. 6rd Prefix Length Type the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in number of bits. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
II-1-3 Multi-VLAN Multi-VLAN allows users to create profiles for specific WAN interface and bridge connections for user applications that require very high network throughput. Simply go to WAN and select Multi-VLAN. Channel 1 to 4 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered. Channel 1: Ethernet on WAN1. Channel 2: Fiber on WAN2 / Ethernet on WAN2 (based on the model) Channel 3/4: USB1 (WAN3) and USB2 (WAN4), respectively.
Port-based Bridge The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value. Enable - Check this box to enable the port-based bridge function on this channel. P1 ~ P4 – Check the box(es) to build bridge connection on LAN. To configure a PVC channel, click its channel number. WAN links for Channel 5, 6 and 7 are provided for router-borne application such as TR-069.
94 Enable Channel 5/6/7 Check it to enable this channel. WAN Type Specify a WAN type of the PVC Channel/VLAN. General Settings VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value. Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.
authentication. PAP only- Only PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) is used. PAP or CHAP- Both PAP and CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) can be used for PPP authentication. Router negotiates with the PPTP or L2TP server to determine which protocol to use. Always On – If selected, the router will maintain the PPPoE/PPPoA connection. Idle Timeout – Maximum length of time, in seconds, of idling allowed (no traffic) before the connection is dropped.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Channel 8/9/10 Click it to enable the configuration of this channel. WAN Type The connections and interfaces created in every channel may select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the Multi-VLAN application, only the Ethernet WAN type is available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN interface the channel shall use here. General Settings VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number.
II-1-4 WAN Budget This function is used to determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP. Please note that the Quota Limit and Billing cycle day of month settings will need to be configured correctly first in order for some period calculations to be performed correctly. II-1-4-1 General Setup Or, Item Description Index The WAN port. Click to configure WAN Budget for a particular WAN.
tab was used to set up the usage quota. User Defined: The User Defined option in the Criterion and Action tab was used to set up the usage qota. Duration Start and end timestamps of the current cycle. Click WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 link to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to enable such function. Quota Limit Type the data traffic quota allowed for such WAN interface.
Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request. The WAN budget will be reset with an interval of billing cycle. Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of cycle duration is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours. In addition, you can specify which day of today is in a cycle.
If the WAN budget is exhausted, a lock will be displayed on the page if Shutdown WAN interface is selected. Which means no data transmission will be carried out. Moreover, the system will send out a warning message to the administrator if Mail Alert is selected. Or, the system will send out SMS message to the administrator if SMS message is selected.
Application Notes A-1 How to set up Multi-VLAN for triple play deployment? By adding VLAN tags to differentiate the traffic, the service provider is able to deliver video, voice, and data to the subscribers over a single connection, which is also known as the triple play service. This document is going to demonstrate how to configure the Multi-PVC feature for triple play deployment.
2. 3. 102 Configure the channel as follows, (a) enable this channel (b) set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on. (c) enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires. (d) check Enable for Bridge Mode, and select the physical port member to which you're going to connect the STB. Click OK to save the configuration, the configuration will be displayed on the main page. And now you may connect the STB to the Bridged port to use the IPTV service.
Open a Virtual WAN Interface 1. Go to WAN >> Multi-VLAN, click on channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure.
2. 3. 104 Configure the channel as follows, (a) enable this channel. (b) set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on. (c) enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires. (d) enable "Open WAN Interface for this Channel", and select the kind of Application will be used on this channel. (Note: this option is only available on channel 5-7) (e) set up the Internet Access type as the ISP requires.
4. Now, you may use the virtual WAN interface for applications such as IGMP Proxy, this can be done by selecting the WAN interface as "PVC/VLAN".
A-2 Load Balancing and Failover for multi-WAN Vigor Routers Network Administrator may set up multiple Internet connection to share the traffic load, or add a redundant Internet connection to the router and gives a higher reliability to the network connection.
Fai l ov er When configured in Failover mode, the WAN interface will only be active when the primary WAN disconnects, and will be down again when the primary WAN resume its service. To configure a WAN interface in Failover mode, go to WAN >> General Setup, click on the index which you would like to configure to Failover Mode, set Active Mode to "Failover", and for Active When, choose the conditions about when should this interface be activated.
II-2 LAN Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP. The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address.
What is Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP address and the routers will automatically inform for each other. What is Static Route When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for connection is the Static routes function rather than other method.
Web User Interface A LAN comprises a collection of LAN clients, which are networked devices on your premises. A LAN client can be a computer, a printer, a Voice-over-IP (VoIP) phone, a mobile phone, a gaming console, an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV), etc, and can have either a wired (using Ethernet cabling) or wireless (using Wi-Fi) network connection.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively. Index - Display all of the LAN items. Status- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default. LAN2 –LAN5 and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by checking the box of Status. DHCP- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If required, please check the DHCP box for each LAN. IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item.
For detailed information, refer to later section. Force router to use “DNS server IP address …..” Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4/LAN5/LAN6/LAN7/LAN8/DMZ Port instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server (PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server). Inter-LAN Routing Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and LAN). Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated.
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24). LAN IP Alias –Such feature allows specifying multiple gateways (under a switch) with different WAN interfaces for accessing the Internet via the Vigor router. RIP Protocol Control, Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange routing information with neighbouring routers using the Routing Information Protocol.
Network Configuration section above. Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP addresses can be used before they have to be renewed. Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Alternatively, static IP addresses can be manually configured on LAN clients as part of their network settings. No matter how IP addresses are configured, it is important that no two devices get the same IP address. If both DHCP and static assignment are used on a network, it is important to exclude the static IP addresses from the DHCP IP pool. For example, if your LAN uses the 192.168.1.x subnet and you have 20 DHCP clients and 20 static IP clients, you could configure 192.168.1.
II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ~ LAN8 and DMZ Available settings are explained as follows: 116 Item Description Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration. For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT function. For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this function. IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default: 192.168.1.1).
Network Configuration section above. Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP addresses can be used before they have to be renewed. Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
II-2-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet Available settings are explained as follows: 118 Item Description Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration. For Routing Usage, IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default: 192.168.1.1). Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
50 and the maximum is 253. Lease Time - Enter the time to determine how long the IP address assigned by DHCP server can be used. Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for the clients coming from P1 and/or P2. Please check the box of P1 and P2. Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.
It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and the other is DHCPv6 (Stateful) server. Available settings are explained as follows: 120 Item Description Enable IPv6 Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6 Setup. WAN Primary Interface Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6. Static IPv6 Address configuration IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN. Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry. Unique Local Address (ULA) configuration Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses assigned to LAN clients. Off - ULA is disabled. Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs generated based on the prefix manually entered. Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an automatically-determined prefix. Current IPv6 Address Table Display current used IPv6 addresses.
Start/End IPv6 address configuration. Disable Server –Click it to disable DHCPv6 server. Auto IPv6 range – After check the box, Vigor router will assign the IPv6 range automatically. Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Type the start and end address for IPv6 server. Advance setting – Click the Edit button to configure advanced IPv6 settings for DHCPv6 server. Advance setting The Advanced Settings page has additional settings for Router Advertisement and enabling multiple WANs for IPv6 traffic.
Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time, Vigor2926 can be treated as the default gateway. Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets are transmitted. MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN. RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Customized List Shows all the DHCP options that have been configured in the system. Enable If selected, DHCP option entry is enabled. If unselected, DHCP option entry is disabled. Interface LAN interface(s) to which this entry is applicable. Next Server IP Address/SIAddr Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66) supplied by the DHCP server. Option Number DHCP option number (e.g., 100). DataType Type of data in the Data field: ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path.
Application Notes A-1 Multi-subnet Application - How to utilize Vigor router with non-NAT? 1. Open LAN>>General Setup. Click the Details Page button of LAN1. 2. In the setting page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings. Note that LAN1 is always for NAT usage.
3. In the setting page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings. Note that LAN1 is always for NAT usage. 4. Return to LAN>>General Setup. Now, LAN2 is available for configuration. Click the Details Page button of LAN2. Choose For Routing Usage. Type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings.
5. Open WAN>>Internet Access. Choose Static or Dynamic IP as Access Mode. Then click Details Page. 6. In the configuration web page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings. 7. Now, a network connection via MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching) between LAN2 user and the Branch user is established successfully. Internet is not required for them.
II-2-2 VLAN Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) allow you to subdivide your LAN to facilitate management or to improve network security. Select LAN>>VLAN from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the VLAN Configuration page. Tagged VLAN The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN.
For Vigor router with 2.4GHz and 5GHz features, the web page will be shown as follow: Info Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration. LAN P1 – P4– Check the LAN port(s) to group them under the selected VLAN. Note: P5 is supported only for Non-Fiber series. Wireless LAN (2.4GHz) SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.
VLAN Tag Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with tag. The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the LAN while sending them out. Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the packets sending by LAN. VID – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is form 0 to 4095. VIDs must be unique. Priority – Valid values are from 0 to 7, where 1 has the lowest priority, followed by 0, and finally from 2 to 7 in increasing order of priority.
Configuring port-based VLAN for wireless and non-wireless clients 1. All the wire network clients are categorized to group VLAN0 in subnet 192.168.1.0/24 (LAN1). 2. All the wireless network clients are categorized to group VLAN1 in subnet 192.168.2.0/24 (LAN2). 3. Open LAN>>VLAN Configuration. Check the boxes according to the statement in step 1 and Step 2. 4. Click OK. 5. Open LAN>>General Setup.
Info 132 As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on Vigor Router” for more detailed information.
II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients. Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address. Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function.
valid MAC address has been bound to an IP address. Otherwise no LAN clients will have network access, and it will not be possible to connect to the router to make changes to its configuration. Apply Strict Bind to Subnet – Choose the subnet(s) for applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC. ARP Table This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field.
Info Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user interface of the router might not be accessed. When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.
II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror The LAN Port Mirror function allows network traffic of select LAN ports to be forwarded to another LAN port for analysis. This is useful for enforcing policies, detecting unauthorized access, monitoring network performance, etc. Select LAN>>LAN Port Mirror from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the LAN Port Mirror configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Port Mirror Enables or disables LAN Port Mirroring.
II-2-5 Wired 802.1x Wired 802.1X provides authentication for clients wishing to connect to the LAN by Ethernet. Only one client can be authenticated on each LAN port. Select LAN>>Wired 802.1X from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the Wired 802.1X configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to enable LAN 802.1x function. Authentication Type External RADIUS - An external RADIUS server is to be used for 802.1X authentication.
II-3 Hardware Acceleration Hardware Acceleration is also called PPA in DrayTek for it is based on Protocol Processing Engine (PPE) of Infineon. It can only support 128 sessions for network traffic (IN & OUT) with implementing three kinds of modes - Disable, Auto and Manual. II-3-1 Setup When the data traffic is heavy and data transmission is getting slowly and slowly, you can configure this page to accelerate the data streaming by hardware itself.
Protocol There are two types supported by this function, TCP and UDP. Option Accelerate heaviest traffic sessions – Such option is available in Auto Mode, too. But the UDP protocol is only supported in this sub-item. Apply the Class Rule in Quality of Service – Users can apply the information provided by QoS in this sub-item. Please visit our website for referring the detailed configuration of QoS. Specific Hosts – This sub-item provides 5 hosts for adding NAT sessions into the PPA.
140 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-4 NAT Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one. Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.
Web User Interface II-4-1 Port Redirection Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN), such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.
Each item is explained as follows: Item Description Index Display the number of the profile. Enable Check the box to enable the port redirection profile. Service Name Display the description of the specific network service. WAN Interface Display the WAN IP address used by the profile. Protocol Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Public Port Display the port number which will be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting. Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range. In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port) and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP automatically.
Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc. Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to reset the router in order to avoid confliction. For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80.
II-4-2 DMZ Host As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single host in the LAN.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description WAN1 Choose Private IP or None first. Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose IP to select one. Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function. Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose IP to select one. Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
II-4-3 Open Ports Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications. Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella, WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.
Available settings are explained as follows: 150 Item Description Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry. Comment Make a name for the defined network application/service. WAN Interface Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry. Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying. WAN IP Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry. This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. II-4-4 Port Triggering Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function. The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is: Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps the ports opened forever. Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering" will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.
Item Description Index Indicate the relative number for the port triggering profile. You should click the appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry. Enable Check the box to enable the Port Triggering profile. Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this rule. Triggering Protocol Display the protocol of the triggering packets. Triggering Port Display the port of the triggering packets. Source IP Display the name of the IP object.
Object link to create a new one for applying. Triggering Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such triggering profile. Triggering Port Type the port or port range for such triggering profile. Incoming Protocol When the triggering packets received, it is expected the incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of such triggering profile. Incoming Port Type the port or port range for the incoming packets.
II-5 Applications Dynamic DNS The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the specified Dynamic DNS server.
UPnP The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Web User Interface II-5-1 Dynamic DNS Enable the Function and Add a Dynamic DNS Account 1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test. 2. Open Applications>>Dynamic DNS. 3. In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup. Available settings are explained as follows: 156 Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Setup Check this box to enable DDNS function.
4. View Log Display DDNS log status. Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server. Auto-Update interval Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS service. Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of DDNS setup to set account(s). Enable Check the box to enable such account. WAN Interface Display the WAN interface used. Domain Name Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of DDNS setup.
Available settings are explained as follows: 158 Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Account Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2). WAN Interface WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the first channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.
selected as Service Provider. (e.g: /dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j* ***.changeip.org&ip=###IP### &cmd=update&offline=0) 5. Auth Type Two types can be used for authentication. Basic – Username and password defined later can be shown from the packets captured. URL - Username and password defined later can be shown in URL. (e.g., http://ns1.vigorddns.com/ddns.php?username=xxxx& password=xxxx&domain=xxxx.vigorddns.
Available settings are explained as follows: 160 Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Account Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2). Service Provider Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider. Wizard – This button is available when DrayTek Global is selected as Service Provider.
Disable the Function and Clear all Dynamic DNS Accounts Uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and click Clear All button to disable the function and clear all accounts from the router. Delete a Dynamic DNS Account Click the Index number you want to delete and then click Clear All button to delete the account.
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2926 series will respond the specified private IP address.
Profile Display the name of the LAN DNS profile. Domain Name Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile. Forwarding Display that such profile is conditional DNS forwarding or not. DNS Server Display the IP addres of the DNS Server. To create a LAN DNS profile: 1. Click any index, say Index No. 1. 2. The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable such profile.
Only use this record…. – Different LAN PCs can share the same domain name. However, you have to check this box to make the router identify & respond the IP address for the DNS query coming from different LAN PC. Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list. 3. Click OK button to save the settings. 4. If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.
II-5-3 DNS Security DNS security is able to ensure that the incoming data is not falsified and the source of the data is secure and correct to prevent from DNS attack by someone. II-5-3-1 General Setup All of WAN interfaces of Vigor router can be configured with DNS Security enabled respectively. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Interface There are four WAN interfaces allowed to be set with DNS security enabled. Enable Check the box to enable the DNS security management.
II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose This page is used to configure settings for manually detecting if the domain is secure not. Available settings are explained as follows: 166 Item Description Domain Type the domain name or IP address (IPv4/IPv6) that you want to query. Interface Specify the interface required for executing diagnose. DNS Server Type the IP address of the DNS Server which will diagnose the domain specified above. Diagnose Click it to perform the diagnosis for the domain.
II-5-4 Schedule The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions. You have to set your time before set schedule.
Enable Click the box to enable such schedule profile. Comment Display the name of the time schedule. Time Display the valid time period by time bar. Frequency Display which day(s) will be always on and which day(s) will be always off of the schedule profile by color boxes. - If it lights in green, it means such schedule is active. You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings. To add a schedule: 1.
Action Specify which action should be applied during the period of the schedule. Force On -Force the connection to be always on. Force Down -Force the connection to be always down. How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied. Cycle duration 3. Once -The schedule will be applied just once Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should perform the schedule. Specify the days to reset the traffic record.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable RADIUS client feature. Server IP Address/Hostname - Enter the IP address of RADIUS server. Destination Port - The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138. Shared Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret.
II-5-5-2 Internal RADIUS Except for being a built-in RADIUS client, Vigor router also can be operated as a RADIUS server which performs security authentication by itself. This page is used to configure settings for internal RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by Vigor router directly. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable internal RADIUS client feature.
Authentication Port Set a port number for internal RADIUS server. RADIUS Client Access List Allow to configure that clients under specified domain (IPv4 and IPv6) must be authenticated with the specified shared secret. Enable - Check to enable RADIUS client feature. Shared Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret.
II-5-5-3 External TACACS+ It means Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus. It works like RADIUS does. Click the External TACACS+ tab to open the following page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable TACACS+ feature. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of TACACS+ server. Destination Port The UDP port number that the TACACS+ server is using.
II-5-6 Active Directory/LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
II-5-6-2 Active Directory / LDAP Profiles You can configure eight AD/LDAP profiles. These profiles would be used with User Management for different purposes in management. Click any index number link to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the user name is limited to 19 characters. Common Name Identifier Type or edit the common name identifier for the LDAP server.
II-5-7 UPnP The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
II-5-8 IGMP IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. II-5-8-1 General Setting Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port. In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.
IGMP Fast Leave Check this box to make the router stop forwarding multicast traffic to a LAN port as soon as it receives a leave message from that port. Each LAN port should have one IGMP host connected. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. II-5-8-2 Working Groups Available settings are explained as follows: 178 Item Description Refresh Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.
II-5-9 Wake on LAN A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router. In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way, WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.
II-5-10 SMS / Mail Alert Service The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the real-time abnormal situations. Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to different conditions. II-5-10-1 SMS Alert This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and when the SMS will be sent.
II-5-10-2 Mail Alert This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what the content is and when the message will be sent. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to enable such profile. Mail Service Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of the available objects are created in Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Object.
II-5-11 Bonjour Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free. Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services. Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting).
2. Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results. 3. Open System Maintenance>>Management. Type a name as the Router Name and click OK. 4. Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour. 5. Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows.
6. Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a printer).
II-5-12 High Availability The High Availability (HA) feature of the router provides redundancy of network resources, and reduces downtime in case of component failure. The level of sophistication of HA is determined by availability requirements and tolerance of system interruptions. Systems that provide near full-time availability typically have redundant hardware and software. The HA of the Vigor2926 Series is designed to avoid single points-of-failure.
II-5-12-1 General Setup Open Applications>>High Availability to bring up the configuration page to configure High Availability. Available settings are explained as follows: 186 Item Description Enable High Abailablity Check this box to enable HA function. Redundancy Method Select the redundancy method for high availability.
Hot-Standby Such method is suitable when there is only one ISP account. When this method is selected, During normal operation the secondary router will be idling. When the primary router fails to operate normally, the secondary router(s) will take over. WAN settings of the primary and secondary routers are identical. Note: When Hot-Standby is used, the wireless LAN function on secondary router will be “disabled” directlly. Clients can not connect to the secondary router any more.
the system will update the DDNS server to make the user connect to the specified domain name. Syslog Enable – Check the box to record required information on Syslog. LAN1 ~ LAN6, DMZ Enable – Check the box to enable the interface. Virtual IP - Type the IP address of the router plays the role of Primary device. II-5-12-2 Config Sync This page is used to specify the synchronization time for such Vigor router and only available when Hot-Standby method is specified and High Availability is enabled.
LAN IPv6 router name admin and user passwords. Example: Take the following picture as an example. The upper Vigor2926 is regarded as primary device, the lower Vigor2926 is regarded as secondary device. When primary Vigor2926 Series is broken down, the secondary device could replace the primary role to take over all jobs as soon as possible. However, once the primary device is working again, the secondary device would be changed to original role to stand by.
II-5-13 Local 802.1X General Setup Such page allows you to configure general settings for Local 802.1X server built in Vigor router. The local 802.X server can be used to authenticate wired and wireless LAN clients. Available settings are explained as follows: 190 Item Description Enable Click it to enable the built-in 802.1X server. At present, such feature can be used for wireless and wired 802.1x authentication. User Profile Select All – Click to add all User Profiles to the 802.1X server.
If Local 802.1X is configured as Disabled (unchecked), the Internal RADIUS will be changed as Disabled too, even if it is enabled previously. OK Click it to save the settings. Clear Click it to remove previous setting configuration. Cancel Click it to give up all settings configuration. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Application Notes A-1 How to use High Availability? High Availability provides hardware redundancy to the LAN clients. DrayTek Router has two modes for High Availability feature: Hot-Standby and Active-Standby. In Hot-Standby Mode, Primary and Secondary router share the same WAN source. Usually, only the Primary is online. When Primary goes down, Secondary comes up and use the same WAN line to dial up, and continue to provide Internet service to LAN clients.
(for management Interface) will be considered, e.g., 192.168.1.2 has higher priority than 192.168.1.3…, etc. (c) Authentication Key: enter the same authentication key on all the members. (d) Management Interface: the packets for communication (including deciding the primary, configuration sync, and some maintenance…,etc) between members will be sent in the management interface, in other word, clients in other LAN subnet won't be able to see these packets.
4. 194 Configuring LAN on the primary router. (a) Set up the LAN IP address, it has to be different from the Virtual IP and the LAN IP of secondary router. Again, for any routers with the same Priority ID, their IP addresses will be compared, so we suggest to use a IP with lower number on the Primary one. (b) Gateway IP is the same with LAN IP, and the note in parentheses indicates that the gateway IP provided to LAN clients will be replaced by the Virtual IP.
5. Configure LAN on the secondary router. Mind that the IP should be different and larger than it on the primary router. Info 6. If you have more than one LAN, you should set all the LAN IP of each LAN on Primary and Secondary routers to different IP addresses to avoid IP conflict.
Then confirm the WAN setup by seeing WAN online. 7. After all the functions are set properly on the primary router, we link up the management interface LAN so both routers can start detecting each other, deciding which one should be the primary and syncing the configuration. Since the routers will communicate via the Management Interface, it's required to use the ports that belong to the Management Interface LAN (LAN1 in this scenario). We can check for this information in LAN >> VLAN.
Note: The "Cached Time" indicates the time that router has got the information from the other router ago. Click "Renew" to update the information of remote router, click "Refresh" to update the information of local router. When a sync is finished or the routers are already having the same configuration, it will show the "Equal" result: Note that the router will check if there's any un-synced modification when it reaches the time interval we set in step 2. We may force to sync by clicking the "Sync" button.
10. We may also check the Details page. Sharing the WCF License 11. Now the routers are set, if you have WCF license, you may create a group on MyVigor so these routers can share the same license. (a) 198 First, login to myvigor.draytek.
(b) Give a Group Name, select an HA unused Group ID, and select the member routers in the HA Device drop-down menu: Note that the drop-down menu only lists out the devices that are registered under this MyVigor account. If you don't find the router you are using, please find out which account this device is registered under.
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS? Vigor router supports various DDNS service providers, user can set up user-defined profile to update the DDNS even the service provider is not on the list. Now, DrayTek starts to support our own DDNS service - DrayDDNS. We will provide a domain name for each Vigor Router, this single domain name can record IP addresses of all WAN. Activate DrayDDNS License 200 1.
Configure DDNS Profile 1. Go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup, a. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Setup b. Click an available profile index c. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Account d. Select DrayTek Global (www.drayddns.com) as Service Provider e. Select the WAN you would like to upload the IP to DDNS server f. Click Get domain g.
2. Wait few seconds for router to get the domain name, then, we can click the profile to check the information of license and domain name. Modify Domain Name Currently, only the domain name is allowed to be modified MyVigor website. We will need to register the router to MyVigor server, and log in to MyVigor website to modify it. 1. 2. 202 Please visit https://myvigor.draytek.com/ or go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup >> DrayDDNS profile and click Edit domain.
3. Input the desired Domain name (e.g., XXXX25) and click Update. 4. Vigor router will get the modified domain name when the it performs next DDNS updating. We can click Sync domain to accelerate this process. After few seconds, the router will get the new domain name and print it on the profiles list.
204 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-3 How to Configure Customized DDNS? This article describes how to configure customized DDNS on Vigor routers to update your IP to the DDNS server. We will take “Changeip.org” and “3322.net” as example. Before setting, please make sure that the WAN connection is up. Part A : Changeip.org Note that, Username: jo*** Password: jo******** Host name: j*****.changeip.org WAN IP address: 1.169.185.242 Following is the screenshot of editing the HTML script on the browser to update your IP to the DDNS server.
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically. 1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS client. 2. Set the Service Provider as Customized. 3. Set the Service API as: /dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j****.changeip.org&ip=###IP ### &cmd=update&offline=0 In which, ###IP### is a value which will be replaced with the current interface IP address automatically when DDNS service is running.
WAN IP address: 111.243.178.53 To update the IP to the DDNS server via editing the HTML script, we can type the following script on the browser: “good 111.243.178.53” means our IP has been updated to the server successfully. Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically. 1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS client. 2. Set the Service Provider as Customized. 3. Set the Provider Host as member.3322.net. 4.
Part C : Extend Note The customized Service Provider is also eligible with the ClouDNS.net.
A-4 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management? For simplifying the configuration of LDAP authentication for User Access Management, we implement “Group” feature. There is no need to pre-configure user profile for each user on Vigor router anymore. We only need to configure the Groups DN, then the Vigor router (e.g., Vigor 2926 series) can pass the authentication to LDAP server with the pre-defined Group path. Below shows the configuration steps: 1.
and 210 4. Click OK to save the settings above. 5. Open User Management>>General Setup. Select User-Based as the Mode option.
6. Then open VPN and Remote Access>>PPP General Setup to check the profile(s) that will be authenticated with LDAP server. After above configurations, users belong to either “rd1” or “shrd” group can access Internet after inputting their credentials on LDAP server.
II-6 Routing Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance, security, routing decision, and etc. Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request.
Web User Interface II-6-1 Static Route Static routing is an alternative to dynamic routing. It is a process that the system network administrator can configure network routers with all the required information for packet forwarding. Go to Routing >> Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static route. Both protocols bring different web pages.
Viewing Routing Table 214 Displays the routing table for your reference.
Add Static Routes to Private and Public Networks Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet access has been configured and the router works properly: use the Main Router to surf the Internet. create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2) create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).
2. Click the Routing >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box. Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to 192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK. Available settings are explained as follows: 216 Item Description Enable Click it to enable this profile. Destination IP Address Type an IP address as the destination of such static route. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for such static route.
Static Route for IPv6 You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route. Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route. Status Displays the status of the static route. Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static route. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy II-6-2-1 General Setup Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Click the number of index to access into the configuration web page. Enable Check this box to enable this policy. Protocol Display the protocol used for this policy. Interface Display the interface to send packets to once the policy is matched. Priority Display the priority value for such route policy profile.
2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP. Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface. Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN interface. Destination IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.
4. After specifying the interface, click Next to get the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Force NAT /Force Routing It determines which mechanism that the router will use to forward the packet to WAN. 5. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference. 6. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps: 1. Click the Advance Mode radio button. 2. Click any Index number link (e.g., 1 in this case) to access into the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 222 Item Description Enable Check this box to enable this policy. Comment Type a brief explanation for such profile. Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the WAN interface.
Source Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP. IP Range – Define a range of IP address as source IP addresses. Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such profile. End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile. IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask address. Network – Type an IP address here. Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask for the network. IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a preconfigured IP object/group.
Force NAT or Force Routing. Failover to – Check this button to lead the data passing through specific interface (WAN/LAN/VPN/Route Policy) automatically when the selected interface (defined in Send via if criteria matched) is down. Priority 3. WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an interface as an auto failover interface. VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as a failover tunnel. Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an existed route policy profile.
or Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy. Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be sent by a route policy. Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor router. ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.
Note that the analysis was based on the current "load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it will be 100% the same as the real case.
II-6-3 BGP Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is a standardized protocol designed to exchange routing and reachability information among autonomous systems (AS) on the Internet. II-6-3-1 Basic Settings Set general settings for for local router and neighboring routers. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Local Enable BGP Check the box to enable basic BGP function for local router. Local AS Number Set the AS number for local router.
Profile Name Display the name of the neighboring profile. IP Address Display the IP address specified for the neighboring profile. MD5 Auth Display the status (enabled or disabled) of MD5 authentication. Status Display the connection status for local router and neighboring router. II-6-3-1 Static Network This page allows you to configure up to eight neighboring routers for exchanging the routing information with the local router.
Application Notes A-1 How to set up Address Mapping with Route Policy? Address Mapping is used to map a specified private IP or a range of private IPs of NAT subnet into a specified WAN IP (or WAN IP alias IP). Refer to the following figure. This document introduces how to set up address mapping with Route Policy. When a WAN interface has multiple public IP addresses, Administrator may specify the outgoing IP for certain internal IP address by a Route Policy. 1. Set up WAN IP Alias.
2. Go to Routing>>Load Balance/Route policy. Create a Route Policy for specific IP address to send from specific WAN IP Address. a. Enable this policy. b. Enter Source IP as the range of private IP address. c. Leave the Destination IP and Port as Any. d. Select Interface as WAN, and then select Interface address from the drop-down list. (The List can be edited in WAN IP Alias setting.) e. Enable Failover to other WAN so the traffic will be sent via other Interface when the path fails.
A-2 How to use destination domain name in a route policy? Route Policy supports using a domain name as destination criteria. It provides a more direct way to set up route polices if the network administrator is trying to specify the gateway for the traffic that destined for a certain website. To use a destination domain name as criteria, just select Domain Name as Destination in Criteria, and enter the domain name in the empty field.
Auto-create String Objects If you manually enter the domain name in a route policy, after clicking OK to apply the route policy, those domain names will be given a number. That means the router has automatically created string objects for those domain names, so that they can be used in other route policies or other functions.
A-3 How to use a Public IP on LAN We cannot disable NAT on Vigor Router, but still, we may can use a public IP address on a host behind Vigor Router. If our ISP allocates a block public IP addresses for us, then we may use the public IP address with IP Routed Subnet or Routing Usage LAN. Suppose ISP provides a public IP subnet 211.100.200.152/255.255.255.248 for us, and the gateway IP is 211.100.200.158. The public IP addresses we can use are between 211.100.200.153 to 211.100.200.157.
Routing Usage LAN IP Routed LAN Setup 1. Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for IP Routed Subnet. 2. Set up TCP/IP details for IP Routed Subnet. a. Enable IP Routed Subnet. b. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN IP. c. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP. 3. For the host behind Vigor Router to obtain the public IP address, we may: a. Configure a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host b.
c. Set up DHCP IP pool, enable Use MAC Address, add the host's MAC address to the table, and connect the host to the router from any of the LAN ports. After finishing above configurations, host with a public IP 211.100.200.154/ mask 255.255.255.248/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be able to access Internet through Vigor Router. Routing Usage LAN We may also create a LAN subnet for routing usage. Here we take LAN 2 for example. 1. Go to LAN >> VLAN, a. Enable VLAN Configuration. b.
2. Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for LAN 2. 3. Set up TCP/IP details for LAN 2, a. Enable LAN2. b. Select For Routing Usage. c. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN IP. d. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP. 4. 236 For DHCP Server Configuration, we may either: Disable DHCP Server, and manually set a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host.
After finishing the above configurations, PC or Server that connects to Port 5 or Port 6 with IP settings as IP 211.100.200.154/ mask 255.255.255.252/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be able to access Internet through Vigor Router. Trouble-shooting If PC with public IP address setting cannot access Internet after above configuration, please check: If the public IP address has been used by another device.
A-4 Introduction to Load Balance/Route Policy This document introduces the Load-Balance/Route Policy. This feature allows network administrator to manage the outbound traffic more specifically. The Policy set in Load-Balance/Route Policy always has higher priority than Default Route and Auto Load Balance set in WAN >> General Setup, and always has lower priority than the Firewall Rules. Administrator may also define a priority to this policy.
The above configuration is an example that if a packet is sent from192.168.1.10~192.168.1.100 to 8.8.8.8, no matter what the protocol or destination port is, it will follow this route policy. 2. Next, we select an interface and gateway through which should the packet be sent if it matches the criteria. a. Select an Interface. b. Select a Gateway IP. Note that if Interface is chosen to be a LAN, it is necessary to designate a specific gateway.
240 Priority: Administrator may set priority between 1 and 249 for this Route policy, where smaller number indicates higher priority. When two policies are having the same priority, the first (according to the policy index order) matched policy will be implemented.
II-7 LTE LTE WAN with SIM card can provide convinent Internet access for Vigor router. However, we can't stop thinking about what can Vigor router utilize this SIM card to provide more useful functions for user? Now, we have developed some useful functions for user, such as sending SMS from a router to report router status, rebooting router remotely via SMS with taking security into consideration, and so on. This section can guide you to use the SIM card in LTE WAN to perform SMS related operations.
Web User Interface II-7-1 General Settings II-7-1-1 SMS Quota This page allows you to configure general settings for LTE. When SMS Quota Limit is enabled, you can specify the number of SMS quota, actions to perform when quota exceeded, and the period of resetting SMS quota used. Available settings are explained as follows: 242 Item Description Enable SMS Quota Limit Check the box to enable such feature. Quota Limit Specify the maximum number of sending SMS for LTE.
starting day in one month. The number of SMS sent will be reset. Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request. The number of SMS sent will be reset with an interval of cycle duration. Custom – Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of reset is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours.
II-7-2 SMS Inbox This page will list the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card. The SMS Inbox table shows the received date, the phone number or sendor ID where this message was from, and the begining of the message content. Since the data size of one SMS is limited, a long message will be sent by multiple SMS. For the convenience of users, we provide two modes. Simple Mode lists SMS messages in order for received time. Advanced Mode lists SMS in order for real index in the SIM card.
Message Content - Display the full content of the message. OK - Return to previous page. Delete - Click it to delete this message and return to previous page. Next - Click it to see the content of next message. II-7-2-1 Advanced Mode Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mark as Read Those SMS in "unread" state are shown in bold text. If you want to change SMS into "read" state, select them and click the OK button.
Message Content - Display the full content of the message. OK - Return to previous page. Delete - Click it to delete all SMS of this message and return to previous page. Next - Click it to see the content of next SMS index.
II-7-3 Send SMS This page is used to send SMS messages by the LTE SIM card. It also displays the number of SMS required to send the message. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Recipient Number Type the phone number of the recipient. The format can be an international phone number ( +8869123455678) or a general phone number(0912345678). Data Coding Scheme The router will automatically select a suitable Data Coding Scheme according to the current content in Message.
II-7-4 Router Commands This page allows the user to set function to reboot Vigor router remotely and get the router status via SMS. Go to LTE>>Router Commands to get the following page.
PIN authentication for any mobile phone). The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and baseline. Access Control List Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers. The phone number specified here is capable of sending SMS to reboot such Vigor router remotely. Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified here are allowed to send SMS to reboot Vigor router if correct password is given.
II-7-5 Status Vigor router with LTE function is capable of accessing into Internet and able to send SMS to specified mobile phone. This page will display basic information about the embedded LTE module and the current LTE connection. Each item is explained as follows: 250 Item Description Status LTE WAN status. IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity of the embedded LTE module. IMSI International Mobile Subscripber Identity of the LTE SIM card.
WLAN 2.4G wireless. If Yes, the interfered 2.4G wireless channels will be indicated. Max Channel TX Rate / Max Channel RX Rate Maximum TX/RX link rate of LTE connection. SMS Centre Number The phone number for SMS service of the LTE SIM card. SMS Service status Whether the SMS service of the LTE SIM card is ready. SMS Loading Whether the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card have been loaded to the Router. New SMS The number of unread SMS in SMS Inbox.
This page is left blank.
Part III Wireless LAN Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.
III-1 Wireless LAN (2.4GHz/5GHz) This function is used for “n”and “ac” models only. Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth. Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via wireless communication products.
Vigor router supports four SSID settings for wireless connections. Each SSID can be defined with different name and download/upload rate for selecting by stations connected to the router wirelessly. Real-time Hardware Encryption Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest protection to your data without influencing user experience.
Manage Wireless Stations - Station List It will display all the stations in your wireless network and the status of their connection. DFS Restrictions Some of 5GHz channels are DFS channels which are governed radars. Without passing DFS certificate test, we can not open those DFS channels in Vigor router. We are working on DFS certification in Europe and open those channels by releasing new firmware once we receive DFS certification.
Web User Interface III-1-1 Wireless Wizard The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing into Internet). Follow the steps listed below: 1. Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard. 2. The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal users in a company or your home.
Item Description Wireless 2.4GHz Settings Name Type the SSID name of this router for wireless 2.4GHz. The default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name if required. Mode At present, the router can connect to 11n Only, 11g Only, Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11a+11n), Mixed (11g+11n), and Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mix (11b+11g+11n) mode. Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes. 3. After typing the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN network and VPN connection. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Wireless 2.4GHz Settings Enable/Disable Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.
above SSID Type the SSID name of this router. (SSID2) Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK. The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde..."). Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
III-1-2 General Setup By clicking the Wireless LAN>>General Setup, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more information. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Wireless LAN Check the box to enable wireless function. Mode 2.4GHz in “n” and “ac” model: At present, the router can connect to 11g Only, 11n Only(2.
5 GHz in “n” model: At present, the router can connect to 11a Only, 11n Only (5 GHz), Mixed (11a+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed (11a+11n) mode. 5 GHz in “ac” model: At present, the router can connect to 11a Only, 11n Only (5 GHz), Mixed (11a+11n) and Mixed (11a+11n+11ac) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed (11a+11n+11ac) mode. Note: 802.11b/g operates on 2.4G band, 802.11a operates on 5G band, 802.11n operates on either 2.4G or 5G band, and 802.11ac operates on 5G band only.
5 GHz in “ac” model: Note: For the restricted channels on DFS, please refer to 4.18.1 Basic Concepts for more detailed information. Hide SSID Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN. Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows you to set four sets of SSID for different usage.
III-1-3 Security This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it. The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.
Mode There are several modes provided for you to choose. Info You should also set Wireless LAN(2.4GHz) 802.1X Setting simultaneously if 802.1x mode is selected. Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism. WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key. WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol. WPA/802.
order to prevent key reinstallation attack. WEP 64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445.) 128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters, such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D). All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption bit size and have the same key.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Mac Address Filter Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients (expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you check SSID 1 and SSID 2. MAC Address Filter Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.
Info WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported. It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router. Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press a button on wireless client, and WPS will connect for client and router automatically.
On the side of Vigor2926 series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card. If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client. Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows: 270 Item Description Enable WPS Check this box to enable WPS setting. WPS Status Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless security (encryption) function of the router is properly configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here. SSID Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1 only. Authentication Mode Display current authentication mode of the router. Only WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.
III-1-6 WDS WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP) wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application: Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air. Extend the coverage range of a WLAN. Refer to the following table: WDS Mode Wireless Signal Comparisons Wireless stations (clients) within the effective range of wireless signal can access into Internet through the router /AP.
The major difference between these two modes is that: while in Repeater mode, the packets received from one peer AP can be repeated to another peer AP through WDS links. Yet in Bridge mode, packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded to local wired or wireless hosts. In other words, only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding. In the following examples, hosts connected to Bridge 1 or 3 can communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 2 through WDS links.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not invoke any WDS setting. Bridge mode is designed to fulfill the first type of application. Repeater mode is for the second one. Security There are three types for security, Disable and Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the following Pre-shared key field be valid or not. Choose one of the types for the router.
Bridge If you choose Bridge as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address (of VigorAP/Vigor router required to make connection with such Vigor router) in these fields. Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time. Yet please disable the unused link to get better performance. If you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.
III-1-7 Advanced Setting This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth, guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission. For “n, ac” model --- Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Operation Mode Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards. However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.
preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind of devices. TX Power Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the signal will be. WMM Capable WMM is an abbreviation of Wi-Fi Multimedia.
III-1-8 Station Control Station Control is used to specify the duration for the wireless client to connect and reconnect Vigor router. If such function is not enabled, the wireless client can connect Vigor router until the router shuts down. Such feature is especially useful for free Wi-Fi service. For example, a coffee shop offers free Wi-Fi service for its guests for one hour every day. Then, the connection time can be set as “1 hour” and reconnection time can be set as “1 day”.
III-1-9 Bandwidth Management The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Bandwidth Management to make the bandwidth usage more efficient. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description SSID Display the specific SSID name. Enable Check this box to enable the bandwidth management for clients.
III-1-10 AP Discovery Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5 seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor. This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which is in the same channel of this router can be found.
III-1-11 Airtime Fairness Airtime fairness is essential in wireless networks that must support critical enterprise applications. Most of the applications are either symmetric or require more downlink than uplink capacity; telephony and email send the same amount of data in each direction, while video streaming and web surfing involve more traffic sent from access points to clients than the other way around.
It is similar to automatic Bandwidth Limit. The dynamic bandwidth limit of each station depends on instant active station number and airtime assignment. Please note that Airtime Fairness of 2.4GHz and 5GHz are independent. But stations of different SSIDs function together, because they all use the same wireless channel. IN SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTS, this function can reduce the bad influence of slow wireless devices and improve the overall wireless performance. Suitable environment: (1) Many wireless stations.
III-1-12 Band Steering Band Steering detects if the wireless clients are capable of 5GHz operation, and steers them to that frequency. It helps to leave 2.4GHz band available for legacy clients, and improves users experience by reducing channel utilization. If dual-band is detected, the AP will let the wireless client connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion. Info 282 To make Band Steering work successfully, SSID and security on 2.
Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Band Steering to get the following web page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Band Steering If it is enabled, Vigor router will detect if the wireless client is capable of dual-band or not within the time limit. Check Time…. – If the wireless station does not have the capability of 5GHz network connection, the system shall wait and check for several seconds (15 seconds, in default) to make the 2.4GHz network connection.
How to Use Band Steering? 1. Open Wireless LAN(2.4GHz)>>Band Steering. 2. Check the box of Enable Band Steering and use the default value (15) for check time setting. 3. Click OK to save the settings. 4. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>General Setup and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>> General Setup. Configure SSID as DrayTek2925_BandSteering for both pages. Click OK to save the settings. Same value for 2.
5. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Security and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>>Security. Configure Security as 12345678 for both pages. Click OK to save the settings. Same value for 2.4GHz and 5GHz 6. Now, Vigor router will let the wireless clients connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.
III-1-13 Roaming The network signal for a single wireless access point might be limited by its coverage range. Therefore, if you want to expand the wireless network in a large exhibition with a quick method, you can install multiple access points with enabling the Roaming feature for each AP to reach the purpose of expanding wireless signals seamlessly. These access points connecting for each other shall be verified by pre-authentication.
III-1-14 Station List Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click this button to refresh the status of station list. Add Click this button to add current typed MAC address into Access Control.
This page is left blank.
Part IV VoIP Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use your broadband Internet connection to make toll quality voice calls over the Internet.
IV-1 VoIP Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use your broadband Internet connection to make toll quality voice calls over the Internet. Info This function is used for “V” models. There are many different call signaling protocols, methods by which VoIP devices can talk to each other. The most popular protocols are SIP, MGCP, Megaco and H.323. These protocols are not all compatible with each other (except via a soft-switch server).
The major benefit of this mode is that you don’t have to memorize your friend’s IP address, which might change very frequently if it’s dynamic. Instead of that, you will only have to using dial plan or directly dial your friend’s account name if you are with the same SIP Registrar. Peer-to-Peer Before calling, you have to know your friend’s IP Address. The Vigor VoIP Routers will build connection between each other.
Web User Interface IV-1-1 VoIP Wizard Vigor router offers a quick method to configure settings for VoIP application. Follow the steps listed below. Info This wizard is available for “V” model only. 1. Open Wizards>>VoIP Wizard. 2. The screen of VoIP Wizard will be shown as follows. Available settings are explained as follows: 292 Item Description Set VoIP service provider domain VoIP service provider - Use the drop down list to choose the ISP which offers the VoIP service for your router.
your ISP. Use the same Account as phone 1 – If you don’t need to configure Phone 2 settings, simply check this box. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the VoIP wizard. 3. After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of VoIP Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
IV-1-2 General Settings Open VoIP>>General Settings. The following page will appear. Check the box of Enable VoIP and click OK to open the configuration page. If not, no settings will be displayed. After checking the box and click OK, the following page appears for you to configure secure phone, IP call; and set NAT Traversal Setting, RTP for the VoIP function.
NAT Traversal Setting STUN Server - Type in the IP address or domain of the STUN server. External IP - Type in the gateway IP address. SIP PING interval - The default value is 150 (sec). It is useful for a Nortel server NAT Traversal Support. RTP Symmetric RTP – Check this box to invoke the function.
Info 296 If the incoming or outgoing calls do not match any entry on the phonebook, the router will try to make the call "being protected". But, if the call ends up "unprotected"(e.g. peer side does not support ZRTP+SRTP), the router will not play out a warning message.
IV-1-3 SIP Accounts In this section, you set up your own SIP settings. When you apply for an account, your SIP service provider will give you an Account Name or user name, SIP Registrar, Proxy, and Domain name. (The last three might be the same in some case). Then you can tell your folks your SIP Address as in Account Name@ Domain name As Vigor VoIP Router is turned on, it will first register with Registrar using AuthorizationUser@Domain/Realm.
the account is failed to register on SIP server. Click any index link to access into the following page for configuring SIP account. Available settings are explained as follows: 298 Item Description Profile Name Assign a name for this profile for identifying. You can type similar name with the domain. For example, if the domain name is draytel.org, then you might set draytel-1 in this field.
SIP Port Set the port number for sending/receiving SIP message for building a session. The default value is 5060. Your peer must set the same value in his/her Registrar. Domain/Realm Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server. Proxy Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. By the time you can type :port number after the domain name to specify that port as the destination of data transmission (e.g., nat.draytel.
solution, you can choose this option. Call Forwarding There are four options for you to choose. Disable is to close call forwarding function. Always means all the incoming calls will be forwarded into SIP URL without any reason. Busy means the incoming calls will be forwarded into SIP URL only when the local system is busy. No Answer means if the incoming calls do not receive any response, they will be forwarded to the SIP URL by the time out. SIP URL – Type in the SIP URL (e.g., aaa@draytel.
Voice Active Detector This function can detect if the voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
IV-1-4 DialPlan This page allows you to set phone book, digit map, call barring, regional settings and PSTN setup for the VoIP function. Click the links on this page to access into next pages for detailed settings. IV-1-4-1 Phone Book In this section, you can set your VoIP contacts in the “phonebook”. It can help you to make calls quickly and easily by using “speed-dial” Phone Number. There are total 60 index entries in the phonebook for you to store all your friends and family members’ SIP addresses.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click this to enable this entry. Phone Number The speed-dial number of this index. This can be any number you choose, using digits 0-9 and * . Display Name The Caller-ID that you want to be displayed on your friend’s screen. This let your friend can easily know who’s calling without memorizing lots of SIP URL Address. SIP URL Enter your friend’s SIP Address.
IV-1-4-2 Digit Map For the convenience of user, this page allows users to edit prefix number for the SIP account with adding number, stripping number or replacing number. It is used to help user have a quick and easy way to dial out through VoIP interface. Available settings are explained as follows: 304 Item Description Enable Check this box to invoke this setting.
OP Number The front number you type here is the first part of the account number that you want to execute special function (according to the chosen mode) by using the prefix number. Min Len Set the minimal length of the dial number for applying the prefix number settings. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web page) as an example, if the dial number is between 7 and 9, that number can apply the prefix number settings here.
IV-1-4-3 Call Barring Call barring is used to block phone calls coming from the one that is not welcomed. Additionally, you can set advanced settings for call barring such as Block Anonymous, Block Unknown Domain or Block IP Address. For Block Anonymous – this function can block the incoming calls without caller ID on the interface (Phone port) specified in the following window. Such control also can be done based on preconfigured schedules.
Click any index number to display the call barring setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check it to enable this entry. Call Direction Determine the direction for the phone call, IN – incoming call, OUT-outgoing call, IN & OUT – both incoming and outgoing calls. Barring Type Determine the type of the VoIP phone call, URI/URL or number. Specific URI/URL or Specific Number This field will be changed based on the type you selected for barring Type.
IV-1-4-4 Regional This page allows you to process incoming or outgoing phone calls by regional. Default values (common used in most areas) will be shown on this web page. You can change the number based on the region that the router is placed. Available settings are explained as follows: 308 Item Description Enable Regional Check this box to enable this function. Last Call Return [Miss] Sometimes, people might miss some phone calls.
Do Not Distrub [Deact] Dial the number typed in this field to release the DND function. Hide caller ID [Act] Dial the number typed in this field to make your phone number (ID) not displayed on the display panel of remote end. Hide caller ID [Deact] Dial the number typed in this field to release this function. Call Waiting [Act] Dial the number typed in this field to make all the incoming calls waiting for your answer.
IV-1-5 Phone Settings This page allows user to set phone settings for Phone 1 and Phone 2 respectively. However, it changes slightly according to different model you have. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Phone Setting Port – there are two phone ports provided here for you to configure. Phone1/Phone2 allows you to set general settings for PSTN phones. Call Feature – A brief description for call feature will be shown in this field for your reference.
Detailed Settings for Phone Port Click the number link for Phone port, you can access into the following page for configuring Phone settings. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Hotline Check the box to enable it. Type in the SIP URL in the field for dialing automatically when you pick up the phone set. Session Timer Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.
communicate, then. Default SIP Account You can set SIP accounts (up to six groups) on SIP Account page. Use the drop down list to choose one of the profile names for the accounts as the default one for this phone setting. Play dial tone only when account registered - Check this box to invoke the function. In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC and DTMF mode.
Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP communication. Volume Gain Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number from 1- 10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is. MISC Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.
the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will be sent to the remote end with SIP message. Payload Type (rfc2833) - Type a number from 96 to 127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode. Replace + digit in caller ID to - For international phone call, the phone number could add a '+' sign, for example, +8865972727. However, the caller ID (DTMF type especially) can not display '+' at all.
IDLE - Indicates that the VoIP function is idle. HANG_UP - Indicates that the connection is not established (busy tone). CONNECTING - Indicates that the user is calling out. WAIT_ANS - Indicates that a connection is launched and waiting for remote user’s answer. ALERTING - Indicates that a call is coming. ACTIVE-Indicates that the VoIP connection is launched. Codec Indicates the voice codec employed by present channel. PeerID The present in-call or out-call peer ID (the format may be IP or Domain).
IV-1-7 Diagnostics VoIP Diagnostics is used for diagnosing if VoIP phone failure is caused by different tone or caller ID.
Part V VPN A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link. It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard Web browser. A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).
V-1 VPN and Remote Access A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.
Web User Interface V-1-1 VPN Client Wizard Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step. 1. Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection Choose the client mode.
Please choose a LAN-to-LAN Profile 2. There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set. When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following page. In this page, you have to select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are six types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page. After making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection(s) you made.
When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic: When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic: Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide 321
When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see the following graphic: Available settings are explained as follows: 322 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.
VPN Dial-Out Through Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only. Or, WAN1 First/ WAN2 First /WAN3 First (or LTE First) /WAN4 First- While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3(or LTE) /WAN4 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 (or LTE) /WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject Name First. Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of the certificates for using. You have to configure one certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >> Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here will not be effective. 3. IPsec Security Method Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.
Item Description Go to the VPN Connection Management Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN Connection status. Do another VPN Server Wizard Setup Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard. View more detailed configuration Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step. 1. Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear. Available settings are explained as follows: 326 Item Description VPN Server Mode Selection Choose the direction for the VPN server. Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically, please choose Site to Site VPN.
Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected. 2. After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing Site-to-Site VPN as the VPN Server Mode.
When you check IPsec, you will see the following graphic: Available settings are explained as follows: 328 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters. User Name This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters. 3. Pre-Shared Key For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a pre-shared key. The length of the name is limited to 64 characters. Confirm Pre-Shared Key Type the pre-shared key again for confirmation. Digital Signature (X.509) Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function. Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list.
Connection Management Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN Connection status. Do another VPN Server Wizard Setup Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard. View more detailed configuration Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration. V-1-3 Remote Access Control Enable the necessary VPN service as you need.
V-1-4 PPP General Setup This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol. PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users with the CHAP protocol first.
332 encryption method is not available, then 40-bit encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data. Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data. Mutual Authentication (PAP) The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to communicate with other routers or clients who need bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger security, for example, Cisco routers.
V-1-5 IPsec General Setup In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration. There are two phases of IPsec. Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509).
IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared Key. Certificate for Dial-in –Choose one of the local certificates from the drop down list. General Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for general authentication. Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication. Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to confirm the pre-shared key.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes. Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of IPsec Peer Identity. Name Display the profile name of that index. Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable this account Check it to enable such account profile. Profile Name Type the name of the profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 32 characters. Accept Any Peer ID Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity. Accept Subject Alternative Name Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address, Domain, or E-mail Address.
V-1-7 OpenVPN OpenVPN offers a convenient way for users to build VPN between local end and remote end. With integrating of OpenVPN, Vigor router can help users to achieve more robust, reliable and secure private connections for business needs. There are two advantages of OpenVPN: It can be operated on different systems such as Windows, Linux, and MacOS.
Certificate Authentication If certificate authentication is required for OpenVPN, simply check the box to apply the trusted CA certificate and local certificate for OpenVPN tunnel. Certificate authentication can offer more secure VPN tunnel between the client and the router. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. V-1-7-2 Client Config The settings on this page can be downloaded as a file.
provider Export Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide The settings in this page can be saved as a file after clicking such button. Later, the downloaded file can be imported to the VPN client for building OpenVPN connection.
V-1-8 Remote Dial-in User You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc. The router provides 64 access accounts for dial-in users.
LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty. Status Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be active and inactive, respectively. Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below: None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection. Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
without specifying the IP address of the remote node. Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key. Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity. IPsec Security Method This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node.
The following shows profiles joined into VPN Load Balance and VPN Backup mechanism. Available settings are explained as follows: 344 Item Description View All – Click it to display the LAN to LAN profiles. Online – Click it to display the online profiles. Offline – Click it to display the offline profiles. Trunk – Click it to display the Trunk profiles. Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.
Name Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty. Remote Network Display the IP address/subnet mask of the remote network. Status Online – means such LAN to LAN profile is in use. Offline – means such LAN to LAN profile isn’t in use even if the profile has been enabled. To edit each profile: 1. Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each LAN-to-LAN profile includes 4 subgroups.
for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead. WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN 3 Only or LTE Only /WAN 4 Only- While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the only channel for VPN connection. WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN connection. WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN connection.
located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel. Dial-Out Settings Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide Type of Server I am calling - PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN connection to the server through the Internet. You should set the identity like User Name and Password below for the authentication of remote server. IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server through Internet. L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec.
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. Select from below: DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme. DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm. 3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme. 3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.
Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of the IP address while identity authenticating with remote VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47 characters. Index(1-15) - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection. Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection. SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an SSL VPN connection through Internet. Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.
GRE over IPsec Settings Enable IPsec Dial-Out function GRE over IPsec: Check this box to verify data and transmit data in encryption with GRE over IPsec packet after configuring IPsec Dial-Out setting. Both ends must match for each other by setting same virtual IP address for communication. Logical Traffic: Such technique comes from RFC2890. Define logical traffic for data transmission between both sides of VPN tunnel by using the characteristic of GRE.
RIP Direction - The option specifies the direction of RIP (Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable. From first subnet to remote network, you have to do - If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route. Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel.
Translated Type – There are two types for you to choose. Whole Subnet Specific IP Address Virtual IP Mapping – A pop up dialog will appear for you to specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP address. 2. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-10 VPN Trunk Management VPN trunk includes four features - VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding tunnel policy. Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup Mechanism VPN TRUNK Management is a backup mechanism which can set multiple VPN tunnels as backup tunnel. It can assure the network connection not to be cut off due to network environment blocked by any reason.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Backup Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. No – The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled. Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the Member1 drop down list below. Active - “Yes” means normal condition.
Detailed information for this dialog, see later section Advanced Load Balance and Backup. Load Balance Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile. No - The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile. Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled. Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile. Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the Member1 drop down list below.
General Setup Status- After choosing one of the profile listed above, please click Enable to activate this profile. If you click Disable, the selected or current used VPN TRUNK-Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile will not have any effect for VPN tunnel. Profile Name- Type a name for VPN TRUNK profile. Each profile can group two VPN connections set in LAN-to-LAN. The saved VPN profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be shown on Member1 and Member2 fields. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
How can you set a VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile? 1. First of all, go to VPN and Remote Access>>LAN-to-LAN. Set two or more LAN-to-LAN profiles first that will be used for Member1 and Member2. If you do not set enough LAN-to-LAN profiles, you cannot operate VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup /Load Balance mechanism profile management well. 2. Access into VPN and Remote Access>>VPN TRUNK Management. 3.
3. Later, on peer side (as VPN Client): please type 192.168.50.100 in the field of My GRE IP and type IP address of the server (192.168.50.200) in the field of Peer GRE IP. Advanced Load Balance and Backup After setting profiles for load balance, you can choose any one of them and click Advance for more detailed configuration. The windows for advanced load balance and backup are different.
Advanced Load Balance Available settings are explained as follows: 360 Item Description Profile Name List the load balance profile name. Load Balance Algorithm Round Robin – Based on packet base, both tunnels will send the packet alternatively. Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with fixed rate. Weighted Round Robin –Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with flexible rate. It can be divided into Auto Weighted and According to Speed Ratio.
tunnel table. Tunnel Bind Table Index- 128 Binding tunnel tables are provided by this device. Specify the number of the tunnel for such Load Balance profile. Active – In-active/Delete can delete this binding tunnel table. Active can activate this binding tunnel table. Binding Dial Out Index – Specify connection type for transmission by choosing the index (LAN to LAN Profile Index) for such binding tunnel table. Scr IP Start /End– Specify source IP addresses as starting point and ending point.
To configure a successful binding tunnel, you have to: Type Binding Src IP range (Start and End) and Binding Des IP range (Start and End). Choose TCP/UDP, IGMP/ICMP or Other as Binding Protocol. Advanced Backup Available settings are explained as follows: 362 Item Description Profile Name List the backup profile name. ERD Mode ERD means “Environment Recovers Detection”.
backup profiles being activated alternatively. Resume – when VPN connection breaks down or disconnects, Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN connection. Detail Information This field will display detailed information for Environment Recovers Detection. V-1-11 Connection Management You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool and clicking Dial button.
Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function. Refresh Seconds - Choose the time for refresh the dial information among 5, 10, and 30. Refresh - Click this button to refresh the whole connection status.
Application Notes A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IPsec Main Mode This document introduces how to set up Main mode IPsec Tunnel between two Vigor Routers.IPsec VPN with Main mode use the IP address of VPN client as identifier, and the IP address must be set on VPN server; therefore, if the VPN client doesn't have a static IP, please use Aggressive mode instead. VPN Server (Dial-In Site) Setup 1.
In Common Settings, (a) Enter the Profile Name. (b) Enable this profile. (c) Set Call Direction to Dial-in. In Dial-In Setting, 3. 366 (d) Make sure Allowed Dial-in Type has IPsec Tunnel enabled. (e) Enable Specify Remote VPN Gateway and enter Peer VPN Server IP as the public IP of VPN client router. (f) Click on IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the Pre-shared Key. (g) Select the IPsec Security Method that are allowed to use.
VPN Client (Dial-out Site) Setup 1. Create a Dial-out profile to VPN server: Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on an available index to add a new profile. 2. Setup the dial-out profile. In Common Settings, (a) Enter a Profile Name. (b) Enable this profile. (c) Set Call Direction to Dial-Out.
(d) Select IPsec Tunnel for Type of Sever I am Calling. (e) Enter VPN Server's WAN IP or domain name in Sever IP/Host Name for VPN. (f) Click IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the same Pre-Shared key as VPN Server. (g) Click on Advanced in IPsec Security Method. In IKE advanced settings, 3. 368 (h) Select Main Mode for IKE phase 1 mode. (i) Make sure phase 1 and phase 2 proposal are using the security methods which are accepted by VPN server. (j) Click OK to save.
VPN Tunnel Establishment To initiate the VPN connection, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management on VPN Client. Select the profile to VPN Sever and click Dial. If all the settings are matched, the VPN will be established, and the statistics will be displayed on the same page.
A-2 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IKEv2 Modified from the previous version IKEv1, IKEv2 is a new VPN protocol and has lots of improvements then the former. It is more stable, more secure and faster connection establishing speed. Support newer and more complicated secure ciphers to make the connection more secure. Using new connection progress and discard the PPP, IKEv2 provides the faster establishing speed.
(a) Check Enable this profile. (b) Select Dial-in as Call Direction. (c) Allow IPsec Tunnel in Dial-In Settings. (d) Input the IP address of LAN_C as Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. (e) Click OK. VPN Client Settings 1. Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN and click an available index. (a) Give a Profile Name. (b) Check Enable this profile. (c) Select Dial-Out as Call Direction. (d) Select IPsec Tunnel with IKEv2 in Dial-Out Settings.
(e) Input VPN server's WAN IP or domain name at Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (f) Input Pre-Shard Key of VPN server. 2. 372 In TCP/IP Network Settings, input the IP address of LAN_S as Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.
V-2 SSL VPN SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that encrypts traffic using SSL, which is the same technology used on secured websites. Because of SSL’s prominence as an encryption protocol on the Internet, most networks have few restrictions on SSL traffic, and as a result SSL VPN is more likely to work when other VPN technologies experience difficulties due to obstacles such as firewalls and Network Address Translation (NAT).
Web User Interface V-2-1 General Setup The general settings of the SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel are entered on this page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Bind to WAN Select the WAN interfaces to accept inbound SSL VPN connections. Port The port to be used for SSL VPN server. This is separate from the management port which is configured in System Maintenance>>Management. The default setting is 443.
V-2-2 User Account With SSL VPN, Vigor2926 series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel mode or proxy mode.
Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Available settings are explained as follows: 376 Item Description User account and Authentication Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function. Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds. User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
Item Description Name and Password of remote dial-in user below. IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish IPsec tunnels. IPsec XAuth - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish an IPSec VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet. L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish L2TP VPN connections. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select one of the following options: None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. L2TP connections are not encrypted.
Item Description Key function and enter a string of up to 63 characters as the pre-shared key. Digital Signature (X.509) – Select this checkbox to enable X.509 Digital Signature and choose a predefined profile that has been set in VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer Identity. IPSec Security Method When the remote node is specified, all fields in this section are required for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec Policy.
V-2-3 User Group Up to 10 user group profiles can be created for authentication by LDAP server. These profiles will be used by applications such as User Management, VPN and etc. Each item is explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Click to clear all profiles. Index Click the profile index to display its detail setting page. Enable Check the box to enable such profile. Name Display the name of the group profile.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable such profile. Group Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters. Authentication Methods Select the authentication methods to be used for SSL VPN. Local User DataBase – The system will perform the authentication using the user defined account profiles (configured in VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Dial-In User).
V-2-4 Online User Status If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface. Next, users can open SSL VPN>> SSL Portal Online Status to view logging status of SSL VPN. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Active User Display the name of the user who is connected to the SSL VPN server. Host IP Display the IP address the user is connected from.
V-3 Certificate Management A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.
Web User Interface V-3-1 Local Certificate Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request window. Type in all the information that the window requests. Then click Generate again. Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below. View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.
Info Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with router’s WAN IP or domain name. After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below: IMPORT Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party, you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a private key.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by Vigor router and signed by CA server. If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of the certificate will be shown as “OK”. Upload PKCS12 Certificate It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually need passwords.
REFRESH Click this button to refresh the information listed below. View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request. Info You have to copy the certificate request information from above window. Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be issued to you by the CA server. You can save it. Delete Click this button to remove the selected certificate.
V-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a RootCA certificate if required. When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g., IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates offered by both ends.
Importing a Trusted CA To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window. For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all the certificate information.
V-3-3 Certificate Backup Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file. Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password and Confirm password. Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.
This page is left blank.
Part VI Security While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet.
VI-1 Firewall While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header, stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.
Web User Interface Below shows the menu items for Firewall. VI-1-1 General Setup General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept incoming fragmented UDP packets.
Data Filter Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Data Filter. Always pass inbound fragmented large packets… Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable “Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”. By checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games.
Default Rule Page Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF, APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router. Available settings are explained as follows: 396 Item Description Filter Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with the filter rules. Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 50000.
User Management Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users specified here. When there is no user profile or group profile existed, Create New User or Create New Group item will appear for you to click to create a new one. APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P application blocking.
strongly recommended to use the default settings here. Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.
VI-1-2 Filter Setup Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page. To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit each rule. Check Active to enable the rule. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Filter Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page.
Action Display the packets to be passed /blocked. CSM Display the content security managed Move Up/Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules. Next Filter Set Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets. Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used settings for filter rule via several setting pages. Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule.
Source IP / Destination IP To set the IP address manually, please choose Any Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as the Address Type and type them in this dialog. Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to. Source Port / Destination Port (=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.
URL Content Filter - Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server.
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps: 1. Click the Advance Mode radio button. 2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Check to enable the Filter Rule Check this box to enable the filter rule. Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14- character long. Index(1-15) Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other LAN. Source IP/ Country and Destination IP / Country Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the IP object or country object as source IP or destination IP. To set the IP address manually, please choose Any Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as the Address Type and type them in this dialog.
To set the service type manually, please choose User defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the service type from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Service Type. Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.
Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be passed through. Branch to other Filter Set If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will not return to previous filter rule any more.
record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information. Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol (0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper. Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.
VI-1-3 Defense Setup As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default. VI-1-3-1 DoS Defense Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality. Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed below.
410 Enable UDP flood defense Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets for a period defined in Timeout. The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively.
Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block some legal packets. For example, when you activate the fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets from the Internet might be dropped. Block TCP flag scan Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function. Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
VI-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense Click the Spoofing Defense tab to open the setup page. VI-1-4 Diagnose The purpose of this function is to test when the router receiving incoming packet, which firewall rule will be applied to that packet. The test result, including firewall rule profile, IP address translation in packet transmission, state of the firewall fuctions and etc., also will be shown on this page. Info 412 The result obtained by using Diagnose is offered for RD debug.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode To have a firewall rule test, specify the service type (ICMP, UDP, TCP) of the packet and type of the IP address (IPv4/IPv6). Direction Set the way (from WAN or from LAN) that Vigor router receives the first packet for test. Different way means the firewall will process the connection initiated from LAN or from WAN. Test View This is a dynamic display page.
sate. If required, click the mode link to configure advanced setting. The common service type (Customize, Ping, Trace Route / Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize, Http(GET) related to that mode (ICMP / UDP / TCP) will be shown on the following dialog box. Analyze Type – Choose Customize, Ping, Trace Route / Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize, Http (GET). Payload – It is available when Customzie is selected. Simply type 16 HEX characters which represent certain packet (e.g.
Application Notes A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get the source from LAN only. The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2. 1.
3. Info 416 Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., block_all). Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK. In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter Rule 2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules starting from Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules will be processed according to Rule 2. 4.
6. A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can access into the Internet. 7. Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.
8. Both filter rules have been created. Click OK. Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.
VI-2 Central Security Management (CSM) CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management. APP Enforcement Filter As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot become much easier.
Web User Interface VI-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering. Available settings are explained as follows: 420 Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Click the number under Index column for settings in detail. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page. Clear All Uncheck all the selected boxes. Enable Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor router.
VI-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade The APPE Enforcement Profile adopted by Vigor router will be treated as the APPE signature. DrayTek will periodically upgrade versions for all of the APPs supported by Vigor router. However, it might be inconvenient for users to upgrade the APP version one by one. This feature is specially designed to offer a quick method to execute APP version upgrade.
Upgrade and wait for the system completing the process. Upgrade Automatically Scheduled Update - Check the box to make Vigor router upgrading the APPE signature based on the schedule configured here. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VI-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal. Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website.
Administration Message You can type the message manually for your necessity. Default Message - You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message. You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile.
first, then URL second. Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog. Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog. All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog. URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature.
Web Feature Enable Web Feature Restriction - Check this box to make the keyword being blocked or passed. Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is selected. Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below. Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation. Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service. Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize searching when you type URL in browser based on the web content filter profile. Setup Test Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. Find more Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.
required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with faster rate. L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the page will be retrieved quickly.
object profile as the content of white/black list. Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below. Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections.
VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's. DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN.
Item Description DNS Filter Profile Table It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with specified WCF and UCF). Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your requirement. DNS Filter Local Setting DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used. DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.
Application Notes A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering the web pages for the sake of protecting your system. To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor. Create an Account via Vigor Router 1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.
2. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically. 3. Click the link of Create an account now. 4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over. If yes, click I am 16 or over.
If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my legal guardian agree. 5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree. 6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click Continue.
7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue. 8. Now you have created an account successfully. 9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter from myvigor.draytek.com. 10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.
11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password. 12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL Content Filter There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter. Web Content Filter, Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block. Note: License is required. URL Content Filter, Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage. Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.) I. Via Web Content Filter 1.
440 2. Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social Networking with Action, Block. 3. Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.
4. Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be blocked and the following message would be displayed instead. II. Via URL Content Filter A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook” 1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page. 2. In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure. 3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page.
5. When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup. 6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside. B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook 442 1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page. 2. In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook.
3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page. 4. Configure the settings as the following figure. 5. When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup. 6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside.
444 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part VII Management There are several items offered for the Vigor router system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation. It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).
VII-1 System Maintenance For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation.
Web User Interface Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.
VII-1-1 System Status The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware related information from this presentation. Available settings are explained as follows: 448 Item Description Model Name Display the model name of the router. Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the router. Build Date/Time Display the date and time of the current firmware build.
DHCP Server - Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN interface DNS - Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS. WAN Link Status - Display current connection status. MAC Address - Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface. Connection - Display the connection type. IP Address - Display the IP address of the WAN interface. Default Gateway - Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway. IPv6 Address - Display the IPv6 address for LAN.
VII-1-2 TR-069 This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS. Available settings are explained as follows: 450 Item Description Tr069 Click Enable to activate the settings on this page. ACS Server On Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.
ACS Server URL – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link. Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS server, port number and the handler. Acquire URL form DHCP option 43 – Check the box to get the URL from DHCP option 43. Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link.
port, minimum keep alive period and maxmum keep alive period respectively. Bandwidth Utilisation Notification Settings To administrator, this feature is useful to monitor the bandwidth utilization of CPE(s). When the bandwidth used is over the threshold level (percentage defined in medium and high fields), a notification will be sent to VigorACS. After a long time observation, the administrator can determine if it is necessary to increase the bandwidth setting for that CPE or not.
VII-1-3 Administrator Password This page allows you to set new password.
454 Administrator Password The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements. Old Password - Type in the old password. The factory default setting for password is “admin”. New Password – Define the basic password. The length of the password is limited to 23 characters. Confirm Password – Enter the basic password again for confirmation.
Administrator LDAP Setting Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Click it to use mOTP as the advanced authentication method. Enter the PIN code and secret settings for one-time usage. 2-Step Authentication via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile – Click it to use authentication code as the advanced authentication method. The authentication code will be sent out based on the selected SMS profile and Mail profile.
VII-1-4 User Password This page allows you to set new password for user operation. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable User Mode for simple web configuration After checking this box, you can access into the web user interface with the password typed here for simple web configuration. The settings on simple web user interface will be different with full web user interface accessed by using the administrator password. Password Type in new password in this field.
3. The following screen will appear. Simply click OK. 4. Log out Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button. 5. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. Type the new user password in the filed of Password and click Login.
6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown as follows. Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic configuration settings will be available in User Mode. Info 458 Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.
VII-1-5 Login Page Greeting When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable the login customization function.
460 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-6 Configuration Backup Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by Vigor2925 to Vigor2926. Backup the Configuration Follow the steps below to backup your configuration. 1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be popped-up, as shown below.
462 Password – Type several characters as the password for encrypting the configuration file. Confirm Password – Type the password again for confirmation. Auto Backup to USB storage The configuration can be stored to a USB connecting to Vigor router as a backup. Backup folder – Set the path for downloading. Periodicity backup – Set the circle duration for backup. Backup after change configuration – Backup will be executed whenever the configuration is changed.
4. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named config.cfg. The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available. Info Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration Backup does not include information of Certificate. Restore Configuration 1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup.
2. Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router. 3. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds. VII-1-7 Syslog/Mail Alert SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog. Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog server. Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB storage disk.
Mail Alert Setup Check Enable to activate function of mail alert. Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail address is available or not. SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the SMTP server. Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out. Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from outside.
3. 466 From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router. Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.
VII-1-8 Time and Date It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Current System Time Click Inquire Time to get the current time. Use Browser Time Select this option to use the browser time from the remote administrator PC host as router’s system time. Use Internet Time Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the Internet using assigned protocol.
Send NTP Request Through Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time synchronization. Click OK to save these settings. VII-1-9 SNMP This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services. The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES) and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs. Available settings are explained as follows: 468 Item Description Enable SNMP Agent Check it to enable this function.
Get Community Set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. The default setting is public. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters. Set Community Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting is private. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters. Manager Host IP (IPv4) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.
VII-1-10 Management This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device Management. The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different. For IPv4 Available settings are explained as follows: 470 Item Description Router Name Type in the router name provided by ISP.
The web user interface will be open until you click the Logout icon manually. Enable Validation Code in Internet/LAN Access If it is enabled, the mechanism of validation code will be offered by Vigor router. That is, the client must type validation code while accessing into Internet or web user interface of Vigor router. Internet Access Control Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
required. Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client, you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can connect, however, it's not recommended. CVM Access Control CVM Port – Check the box to enable such port setting. CVM SSL Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.
Management Access Control Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet. There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify. Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to disable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is enabled by default.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration. VII-1-11 Panel Control The behavior of the LEDs, buttons, USB ports and LAN ports on the front panel of the Vigor router can be customized as desired. For LED By default, the LEDs are enabled, and will illuminate or blink continuously to show the status of the various functions in the router. However, they can be configured to remain off at all times, or remain off until a button is pressed to wake them up.
Status Shows the status of the LEDs: – LEDs are in sleep mode. To wake them up, do one of the following: press the Wake up LED button on this page press the Wireless On/Off/WPS button on the front panel press the Factory Reset button on the front panel. – LEDs are awake. To put them to sleep immediately press the LED sleep immediately button on this page press the Factory Reset button on the front panel for 1 second. After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
button. Disabling the Factory Reset button only prevents it from being used to reboot Vigor router with default settings. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled. Enable Wireless Button The default value is Enabled. Deselect to disable the ability of the Wireless button to control WLAN and WPS functions. Disabling the wireless button only prevents it from being used to control WLAN functions. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click to refresh the page to display the latest information. Port The number corresponds to the LAN port number shown on the front panel. Enable Deselect to disable the LAN port. The default value is enabled. Status Shows the status of the LAN port. Link Up – An active Ethernet device is connected to the port. Link Down – No active Ethernet device is detected. --- – The LAN port is disabled.
Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE.
VII-1-13 Reboot System The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System Maintenance to open the following page. Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page. If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current configuration and click Reboot Now.
VII-1-14 Firmware Upgrade Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to proceed to firmware upgrade. Click the button of Check The Latest Firmware to open a pop up window displaying the newest firmware version released for such Vigor router. Choose the one you need and click Download. After that, click Select to specify the one you just download. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router automatically.
VII-1-15 Firmware Backup The firware for Vigor router can be saved on the host as a backup firmware. After that, if the router crashes due to the firmware error, the backup firmware will be applied to make the router run normally. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Backup Setting Backup after reboot - Current firmware will be backup after rebooting Vigor router. Backup after system running - Perform the firmware backup after a period of time.
V II- 1 - 1 6 A c tiv a tio n There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation. After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer. Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter: Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide 483
VII-1-17 Internal Service User List User profiles (clients) defined and enabled in User Management>>User Profile will be displayed in this page. Such page allows you to turn on or turn off security authentication service (offered by inernal RADIUS and/or Local 802.1X) for each user profile without accessing into the User Management configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description User Name Display the name of the existed user profile.
VII-1-18 Dashboard Control There are nine groups of setting information which can be displayed on Dashboard as a reference for administrator/user. Except for Front Panel and System Information, the settings information regarding to the groups listed on this page can be hidden if required.
VII-2 Bandwidth Management Sessions Limit A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications (e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.
Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and associated service types The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.
Web User Interface Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management. VII-2-1 Sessions Limit In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page. To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit. Available settings are explained as follows: 488 Item Description Session Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit session. Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit session.
Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page. Specific Limitation Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session. End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session. Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do not set the session number in this field, the system will use the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for each index.
VII-2-2 Bandwidth Limit In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page. To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream and downstream limit. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth. IP Routed Subnet – Check this box to apply the bandwidth limit to the second subnet specified in LAN>>General Setup. It is available for IPv4 settings only.
bandwidth limit defined by TX Limit and RX Limit below. Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit bandwidth. End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth. Object – All the IPs specified by the selected IP object or IP group will be restricted by bandwith limit defined by TX Limit and RX Limit below. IP Group – Specify an IP group by using the drop down list. IP Object - Specify an IP object by using the drop down list.
VII-2-3 Quality of Service In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description General Setup Index – Display the WAN/LTE interface number link that you can edit. Enable – Check the box to enable the QoS function for WAN/LTE interface. If it is enabled, you can configure general QoS setting for each WAN/LTE interface. Direction –Define which traffic the QoS Control settings will apply to.
Item Description Name – Display the name of the class. Rule – Allow to configure detailed settings for the selected Class. Service Type – Allow to configure detailed settings for the service type. Enable the First Priority for VoIP SIP/RTP When this feature is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be sent with highest priority. SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP. This page displays the QoS settings result of the WAN interface.
General Setup for WAN Interface Click WAN/LTE interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN interface. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP application traffic since UDP application traffic such as streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth. Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. Now you can define the name for that Class. In this case, “Test” is used as the name of Class Index #1. 3. For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description ACT Check this box to invoke these settings.
Hardware Acceleration Check this box to enable the hardware acceleration when such rule is applied. Ethernet Type Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for this rule. Local Address Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for the rule. Remote Address Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on LAN/WAN) for the rule. Address Type – Determine the address type for the source address. For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.
2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. 3. For adding a new service type, click Add to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Service Name Type in a new service for your request. The maximum length of the name you can set is 11 characters. Service Type Choose the type (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP or other) for the new service.
Port Configuration 5. Type - Click Single or Range as the Type. If you select Range, you have to type in the starting port number and the end porting number on the boxes below. Port Number – Type in the starting port number and the end porting number here if you choose Range as the type. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. By the way, you can set up to 10 service types.
VII-2-4 APP QoS The QoS function is used to do bandwidth management for the services with certain IP or port number. However, there is no effect of bandwidth management on the service such as VNC or PPTV without fixed IP or port number. APP QoS employs the function of APP Enforcement to detect the types of software in application layer.
Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request. Untraceable The protocol listed below is not easy to be traced by Vigor router. Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request. Select All Click it to select all of the protocols. Clear All Click it to de-select all of the protocols. Apply to all Choose one of the actions from the drop down list. It is prepared for applying to all protocols.
Application Notes A-1 How to Optimize the Bandwidth through QoS Technology Have you ever gotten any problems in uploading/downloading files (Voice, video or email/data only) with the narrow/districted bandwidth you may share from the common Internet connection line? The advanced bandwidth management technology-QoS (Quality of Service) helps you to well allocate the bandwidth upon your demand of Voice, Video, or Data transferring.
502 4. Check the box of ACT. Click Edit to specify the local address. 5. In the pop-up window, choose Range Address as the Address Type and type the start IP address and end IP address in relational fields. Click OK to save the settings and exit the window. 6. Click OK again to save the settings.
7. The class rule for VoIP has been set. Click OK to return to previous page. 8. Do the same steps to add class rules for IPTV and Data/Email with IP addresses as shown below.
9. Assuming you get 2MB/512Kb Internet line. You can check Enable of WAN1 to set up the bandwidth for different groups among VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email. 10. Enter 30, 50 and 15 in the boxes for VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email respectively. 11. Click OK to save the settings. The class rules for WAN1 are defined as shown below. 12. Click OK to save the settings. The class rules for WAN1 are defined as shown below.
VII-3 User Management User Management is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic (except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and password. Instead of managing with IP address/MAC address, User Management function manages hosts with user account. Network administrator can give different firewall policies or rules for different hosts with different User Management accounts. This is more flexible and convenient for network management.
Web User Interface VII-3-1 General Setup General Setup can determine the standard (rule-based or user-based) for the users controlled by User Management. The mode (standard) selected here will influence the contents of the filter rule(s) applied to every user. Available settings are explained as follows: 506 Item Description Mode There are two modes offered here for you to choose. Each mode will bring different filtering effect to the users involved.
the filter rules configured in Firewall>>General Setup and Filter Rule to the users. Authentication page Web Authentication - Choose the protocol for web authentication. Login Page Logo – A logo which can be used as an identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352 pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of advertisement.
VII-3-2 User Profile This page allows you to set customized profiles (up to 200) which will be applied for users controlled under User Management. Simply open User Management>>User Profile. To set the user profile, please click any index number link to open the following page. Notice that profile 1 (admin) and profile 2 (Dial-In User) are factory default settings. Profile 2 is reserved for future use.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable this account Check this box to enable such user profile. Username Type a name for such user profile (e.g., LAN_User_Group_1, WLAN_User_Group_A, WLAN_User_Group_B, etc). When a user tries to access Internet through this router, an authentication step must be performed first. The user has to type the User Name specified here to pass the authentication. When the user passes the authentication, he/she can access Internet via this router.
with the limitation configured in this user profile. The maximum length of the password you can set is 24 characters. Confirm Password Type the password again for confirmation. Idle Timeout If the user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the network connection will be stopped for such user. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes. Max User Login Such profile can be used by many users.
Pop Browser Tracking Window If such function is enabled, a pop up window will be displayed on the screen with time remaining for connection if Idle Timeout is set. However, the system will update the time periodically to keep the connection always on. Thus, Idle Timeout will not interrupt the network connection. Authentication Any user (from LAN side or WLAN side) tries to connect to Internet via Vigor router must be authenticated by the router first.
time remained when a user accesses into Internet through Vigor router successfully. When the time is up, all the connection jobs including network, IM, social media, facebook, and etc. will be terminated. Enable Data Quota Data Quota means the total amount for data transmission allowed for the user. The unit is MB/GB. – Click this box to set and increase the data quota for such profile. – Click this box to decrease the data quota for such profile.
VII-3-3 User Group This page allows you to bind several user profiles into one group. These groups will be used in Firewall>>General Setup as part of filter rules. Please click any index number link to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for this user group. Available User Objects You can gather user profiles (objects) from User Profile page within one user group.
Selected Keyword Objects Click box. button to add the selected user objects in this After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VII-3-4 User Online Status This page displays the user(s) connected to the router and refreshes the connection status in an interval of several seconds.
Expired Time Display the expired time of the network connection for the user. Data Quota Display the quota for data transmission. Idle Time Display the idle timeout setting for such profile. Action Block - can avoid specified user accessing into Internet. Unblock – allow the user to access into Internet. Logout – the user will be logged out forcefully.
Application Notes A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management Before using the function of User Management, please make sure User-Based has been selected as the Mode in the User Management>>General Setup page. With User Management authentication function, before a valid username and password have been correctly supplied, a particular client will not be allowed to access Internet through the router. There are three ways for authentication: Web, Telnet and Alert Tool.
If a LAN client who hasn’t passed the authentication opens an external web site in his browser, he will be redirected to the router’s Web authentication interface first. Then, the client is trying to access http://www.draytek.com and but brought to the Vigor router. Since this is an SSL connection, some web browsers will display warning messages. With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you may get the following warning message. Please press Continue to this website (not recommended).
With Chrome browser, you may get the following warning. Click Proceed anyway. After that, the web authentication window will appear. Input the user name and the password for your account (defined in User Management) and click Login. If the authentication is successful, the client will be redirected to the original web site that he tried to access. In this example, it is http://www.draytek.com . Furthermore, you will get a popped up window as the following. Then you can access the Internet.
Note, if you block the web browser to pop up any window, you will not see such window. If the authentication is failed, you will get the error message, The username or password you entered is incorrect. Please login again. In above description, you access an external web site to trigger the authentication. You may also directly access the router’s Web UI for authentication. Both HTTP and HTTPS are supported, for example http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 . Replace 192.168.1.
With the default setup
, you will be redirected to http://www.draytek.com . You may change it if you want. For example, you will get the following welcome message if you enter Login Successful in the Welcome Message table. Also you will get a Tracking Window if you don’t block the pop-up window.VPN Remote Dial-in User profiles can be extended to the User profiles in User Management for authentication. There are two different behaviors when a User Management account and a VPN profile share the same Username: If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is enabled in the VPN profile, the user profile in User Management will always be invalid for Web authentication.
Authentication via Telnet The LAN clients can also authenticate their accounts via telnet. 1. Telnet to the router’s LAN IP address and input the account name for the authentication: 2. Type the password for authentication and press Enter. The message User login successful will be displayed with the expired time (if configured). Info 3. 522 Here expired time is “Unlimited” means the Time Quota function is not enabled for this account. After login, this account will not be expired until it is logout.
4. If the Time Quota is set with “0” minute, you will get the following message which means this account has no time quota. If the Time Quota is enabled and time is not 0 minute, You will get the following message. The expired time is shown after you login. After you run out the available time, you can’t use this account any more until the administrator manually adds additional time for you.
Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool Authentication via Web or Telnet is convenient for users; however, it has some limitations. The most advantage with VigorPro Alert Notice Tool to operate the authentication is the ability to do auto login. If the timeout value set on the router for the user account has been reached, the router will stop the client computer from accessing the Internet until it does an authentication again.
A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature Landing Page is a special feature configured under User Management. It can specify the message, content to be seen or specify which website to be accessed into when users try to access into the Internet by passing the authentication. Here, we take Vigor2926 series router as an example. Example 1：Users can see the message for landing page after logging into Internet successfully 1. Open the web user interface of Vigor2926. 2.
526 4. In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings. 5. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password. 6. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will see the message of Login Success from the browser you use.
Example 2：The system will connect to http://www.draytek.com automatically after logging into Internet successfully 1. In the field of Landing Page, please type the words as below: “
” 2. Next, enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links. 3.528 4. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password. 5. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will be directed into the website of www.draytek.com.
VII-4 Hotspot Web Portal The Hotspot Web Portal feature allows you to set up profiles so that LAN users could either be redirected to specific URLs, or be shown messages when they first connect to the Internet through the router. Users could be required to read and agree to terms and conditions, or authenticate themselves, prior to gaining access to the Internet. Other potential uses include the serving of advertisements and promotional materials, and broadcast of public service announcements.
Applied Interface Shows the interfaces to which this profile applies. Preview Click this button to preview the Hotspot Web Portal page that will be displayed to users. VII-4-1-1 Login Method There are four login methods to choose from for authenticating network clients: Skip Login, Click Through, Social Login, PIN Login, and Social or PIN Login. Each login mode will present a different web page to users when they connect to the network.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable this profile Check to enable this profile. Comments Enter a brief description to identify this profile. Portal Server Portal Method There are four methods to be selected as for portal server. Captive Portal URL Enter the captive portal URL. Redirection URL This setting is available when External Portal Server is selected as the portal method. Enter the URL to which the client will be redirected.
Choose Login Method This setting is available when Various Hotspot Login is selected as the portal method. Select one or more desired login methods: Facebook This setting is available when Various Hotspot Login is selected as the portal method. Select one or more desired login methods: Facebook APP ID - Enter a valid Facebook developer app ID. If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for instructions on obtaining an APP ID.
Background If you have selected a Login Mode that requires authentication, select a background for the login page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Choose Login Background Select either Color Background or Image Background as the login page background scheme. Browser Tab Title Enter the text to be shown as the webpage title in the browser.
Logo Image The DrayTek Logo will be displayed by default. However, you can enter HTML text or upload an image to replace the default logo. Login Method Background Color Select the background color of the login panel from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color. Opacity (10 ~ 100) Available when Image Background is selected. Set the opacity of the background image.
Login Page Setup In this step you can configure settings for the login page. Click Through This section describes the Login Page setup if you have selected Click Through as the Login Method. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.
536 Conditions Description hyperlink text. Terms and Conditions Content Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up window. Accept Button Description Enter the text to be displayed on the accept button Accept Button Color Select the color of the accept button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color. Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page.
Various Hotspot Login This section describes the Login Page setup step if you have selected Various Hotspot Login the login method. You will see only settings that are relevant to the selected login method(s). Settings that are common to Facebook, Google, PIN, and RADIUS authentication are: Item Description Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message. Terms and Conditions Description Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions hyperlink text.
If you have selected Facebook login, the setting will appear: Item Description Facebook Login Description Enter the text to be displayed on the Facebook login button. If you have selected Google login, the setting will appear: 538 Item Description Google Login Description Enter the text to be displayed on the Google login button.
If you have selected PIN login, these settings will appear: Item Description Hint Message for PIN Enter the text used to suggest users to choose SMS authentication. Receiving PIN via SMS Description Enter the text to be displayed on the button that the user clicks to receive an SMS PIN. Receiving PIN via SMS Content Enter the message to be sent by SMS to inform the user of the PIN. The PIN variable is specified by within the message.
If you have selected RADIUS account login, these settings will appear: Item Description Hint Message for RADIUS Enter the text used to prompt the user to login. RADIUS Account Description Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the username. RADIUS Password Description Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the password. Login Button Description Enter the text to be displayed on the login button.
2nd-stage Page for PIN Login If you have selected PIN Login as the login method, you will also need to configure the page that is displayed to users when they request a PIN. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Back Button Description Enter text for the label of the hyperlink to return to the previous page. PIN Code Message Enter text to be displayed as the body text on the page.
542 Code menu. Enter Mobile Number Description Enter message to be displayed in the mobile number textbox to prompt the user to enter the mobile number. Send Button Description Enter the label text of the send button. Send Button Color Select the color of the send button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color. Send Succeeded Message Enter text to be displayed to notify the user after the PIN has been sent.
Whitelist Setting In this step you can configure the whitelist settings. Users are allowed to send and receive traffic that satisfies whitelist settings. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description NAT Rules To prevent web portal settings from conflicting with NAT rules resulting in unexpected behavior, select the NAT rules that are allowed to bypass the web portal. Hosts listed in selected NAT rules can always access the Internet without being intercepted by the web portal.
More Options In this step you can configure advanced options for the Hotspot Web Portal. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Quota Management Expired Time After Activation Enter the time duration that users are allowed to have Internet access after logging in. Quota Policy Profile Choose a policy profile to apply to web portal clients.
alert the user of certificate errors. If this option is not selected, attempts to access to HTTPS website will time out without redirection. Captive Portal Detection If this option is selected, the web portal page is triggered automatically when an unauthenticated client tries to access the Internet. This function is not available when the Login Mode is Social Login, as the web portal page may not be shown correctly due to the limitations of the operating system’s built-in Captive Portal Detection.
VII-4-2 User Information This page displays information of users accessing the Internet through the web portal. Clicking on a user link will open a new window that shows detailed information about that user. VII-4-2-1 User Info You may choose to limit the displayed user information by adding profile or login method filters. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Select Columns to Filter Users Select the profiles and the login methods to filter the displayed users.
Information about the user is shown under the Login Info section. Devices used by the user are shown under the Devices section. To forcibly log out a device, select the checkbox in front of the device and click the Log Out Device button. The Login History section shows the 10 most recent login sessions of the user. VII-4-2-2 Database Setup This page allows the user to configure settings for database on USB disk.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable database Check the box to record user information on router’s database. Before checking this box, insert a USB disk with adequate storage space, first. Enable sending user information to syslog Check the box to send user information to syslog. File Path If a USB disk has been inserted into the USB port of Vigor router, the file path will be shown in this area. Database Usage Display the usage and remaining space on the database.
VII-4-3 Quota Management The system administrator can specify bandwidth and sessions quota which is only applicable to the web portal clients. Settings configured in Quota Management will override the policies set in Bandwidth Management>>Bandwidth Limit and Bandwidth Management>>Limit. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Bandwidth Limit Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth Management>>Bandwidth Limit.
To create a new quotal policy profile, click Add to open the followining page. Available settings are explained as follows: 550 Item Description Profile Name Enter a name for a new profile. Account Validity Set the duration for which the login is valid. Expired Time After the First Login – Sets the days, hours, and minutes. After the login has expired, Vigor router will block the client from accessing the network/Internet.
Bandwidth and Session Limit Bandwidth Limit – Check the box to configure bandwidth limit for web portal client. Download/Upload Limits – Set the maximum upload and download speeds. Session Limit- Check the box to configure a maximum session limit for web portal clients. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Application Notes A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts (e.g., Facebook & Google) Vigor Router supports Hotspot Web Portal function. The network administrator can set Vigor Router as a Hotspot provider with web authentication and allow users to log in with their social media accounts, such as Facebook and Google. We demonstrate how to set up the hotspot web portal with Facebook login in the following paragraphs. Vigor Router Setup 552 1.
3. Enter the values as the following figure. (a) Click Enable this profile. (b) Enter the comments. (c) Select Various Hotspot Login for Portal Method. (d) Choose Login with Facebook or Login with Google as Login Method. If Login with Facebook is selected, the protocol of the Captive Portal URL need to be changed to HTTPS instead of HTTP because Facebook force to use HTTPS URL in their policy. (e) Enter the APP ID and secret. (f) Click Save and Next.
4. Choose the Color Background, customize the information a logo color, and click Save and Next. You can click the Step Icon on the top of the page to go to the step you want. The router will save your setting automatically.
Or choose the Image Background, customize the information and background image, and click Save and Next.
556 5. Customize the descriptions on the login page, then click Save and Next. 6. You can set the Whitelist for the profile here to allow specific clients to access the internet or certain websites can be visited without login.
7. Set up the Expired Time After Activation and Landing Page After Activation that Hotspot clients will see after they login successfully. Finally, select the interfaces to which you would like this hotspot profile apply to, then click Finish to save the setting. 8. Then the Hotspot setup is finished. You may click Preview to check the login page.
Hotspot Clients Login 9. Now, when clients connect to the selected router interface, and try to access internet, they will be redirected to "portal.draytek.com". Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "Continue" before they can proceed to portal.draytek.com. The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN.
11. If the credentials are correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page and be able to access the Internet afterward. User Information Network administrator can plug the USB disk to router, to record the basic information of the users who connect to the Wi-Fi and login with their social media accounts. The users' basic information will be listed on Hotspot Web Portal >> Users Information page.
A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS? Since 3.8.4.3 version firmware, Vigor Router can act as a hotspot gateway and provide internet access only to the authenticated clients. Network Administrator may set up the router to allow hotspot client to get the login PIN code from an SMS message. This note is going to demonstrate how to set up Vigor Router as a hotspot gateway and be able to send the PIN code to clients by SMS messages. Vigor Router Setup 1.
3. Enter the Service Provider details, and click OK to apply. 4. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available profile. 5. Enable the profile, give a comment, and choose “PIN Code Login”. Then click Next.
6. Choose a login page design, customize the details, and click Next. 7. Edit the message on the login page, and click Next. 8. Edit the details for SMS settings, then click Next.
9. Edit the landing page, choose the interfaces to which the SMS login should apply, and then click Finish. 10. Now, the hotspot settings are applied to the selected interfaces. You may click Preview to check how the login page looks.
Hotspot Client Login 11. If the client connected to the selected interface of the router and try to open a webpage, they will be redirected to hotspot login page. If they do not have a password yet, they can click on the button to get a password.
Info Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "continue" before they can proceed to portal.draytek.com. The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS to make sure the domain name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP. 12. Enter the mobile phone number to receive the SMS message.
13. The number will get a message about the password. 14. Enter the password on the login page, and click Login. 15. If the password is correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page, and after that, they will be able to surf the Internet.
VII-5 Central Management (VPN) Vigor2926 can build virtual private network (VPN) between itself and any other TR-069 CPE by the function of central VPN management. In addition, it can be treated as a server (called CVM server) which can manage TR-069 CPE for periodical firmware upgrade, configuration backup and restoring configuration.
Web User Interface Central VPN Management menu can manage the CPE connected through WAN only. VII-5-1 General Setup This page is used to configure settings which will be used by the clients to register to such Vigor router. Click General Settings and IPsec VPN Settings to configure the basic settings for CVM mechanism. VII-5-1-1 General Settings To enable the CVM feature, the first thing you have to do is enabling CVM port or CVM SSL Port.
Username Type a username which will be used by any CPE trying to connect to Vigor router. Password Type the password for the user. Polling Interval Type the time value (unit is second). The range is from 60 ~ 86400. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VII-5-1-2 IPsec VPN Settings Central VPN management is operated through IPsec VPN connection.
VII-5-2 CPE Management All the CPEs managed by Vigor2926 series can be seen with icons from this page. Before using such feature, make sure the CVM port has been enabled and configured properly. VII-5-2-1 Managed Device List This page allows you to manage the CPEs connected to Vigor2926 series.
Page with CPE connected Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Managed Devices List This area displays device icons (up to 8) for the CPE managed by Vigor2926 series. Edit – To modify the name and location of specific CPE, click the one you want and click the Edit button. A pop up window will appear. Simply change the name and/or location manually. Delete – To disconnect the management of any CPE, click the CPE icon you want and click the Delete button.
572 Unmanaged Devices List Any device (CPE) which follows the standard of TR-069 can be configured and can be detected by Vigor2926 series automatically. Only eight remote devices can be managed by Vigor2926 at one time. Therefore, other remote devices detected by Vigor2926 series might not be displayed in such field. Add – Move the selected device from Unmanaged Devices List to Managed Devices List. IP Address – Display the IP address of the remote device.
VII-5-2-2 CPE Maintenance This area displays all the profiles which are created for applying to the managed device. This page can help the administrator to do maintenance jobs like firmware upgrade, configuration backup, configuration restoration and etc. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click it to refresh current page. USB Disk Vigor2926. Vigor2926.
Device Name Display the name of the managed CPE that the maintenance profile will apply to. Action Display the action that managed CPE shall accept. Schedule Display the schedule profiles selected for such profile. Now The action will be performed for the selected CPE immediately. How to add a new Maintenance Profile Follow the steps below to create a new maintenance profile. 1. Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1. 2. The Maintenance dialog appears.
Config Backup – It means such profile will be used for configuration backup of the selected CPE. Config Restore – It means such profile will be used for restoring the configuration of the selected CPE. Info When restoring configuration to a CPE, make sure the configuration file you selected was backup from this CPE before. Because restoring from another device's configuration file may cause serious problem (e.g., Both devices have different ISP username/ password.
VII-5-2-3 Google Map To display the location of the managed CPE with a bird’s eye view, open Central VPN Management>>CPE Management and click the tab of Google Map.
VII-5-3 VPN Management An easy and quick method is offered to configure VPN settings for building VPN connection automatically between Vigor2926 series (treated as VPN server) and other Vigor router (treated as CPE device, i.e., VPN client). Available parameters are listed as follows: Item Description CPE VPN Connection List VPN Display the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile.
VII-5-4 Log & Alert This page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor2926 series. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Mode Choose the mode you want to display the related information on the following table. Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is full, the system will stop recording. Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system. Device Name Display the name of the managed CPE.
Application Notes A-1 CVM Application - How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor2926 series? To manage CPEs through Vigor2926 series, you have to set URL on CPE first and set username and password for Vigor2926 series. For this section, we use Vigor2850 series as the example. All the CPE configuration will be done through Vigor2850 series. Configure CVM Settings on Vigor2926 series 1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor2926 series. 2. Open Central Management>> VPN >>General Setup. 3.
Configure Settings on CPE 580 1. In the end of the CPE, access into the web user interface of the CPE (e.g., Vigor2850 series). Open a web browser (for example, IE, Mozilla Firefox or Netscape) and type http://192.168.1.1. 2. Open System Maintenance >> TR-069. 3. In the field of ACS Server, type the URL (IP address with port number) of Vigor2926 series and type the same Username and Password defined on the page of Central Management>> VPN >>General Setup in Vigor2926 series.
5. Check Allow management from the Internet to set management access control and click OK. 6. Open WAN>>Internet Access. Use the drop down list of Access Mode on WAN1 to select MPoA (RFC1483/2684). Then, click Details Page. 7. Click Specify an IP address. Type correct WAN IP address, subnet mask and gateway IP address for your CPE. Then click OK.
Info Reboot the CPE device and re-log into Vigor2926 series. CPE which has registered to Vigor2926 series will be captured and displayed on the page of Central Management>>VPN>>CPE Management. Check CPE Maintenance Page 582 1. Return to the web user interface of Vigor2926 series. 2. Open Central Management>>VPN>>VPN Management. Now there is one CPE displayed on the field of Unmanaged Devices List. 3. Choose the one (Vigor2850) from Unmanaged Devices List and click Add.
A-2 CVM Application - How to build the VPN between remote devices and Vigor2926 series? When a remote device is managed by Vigor2926 series, it is easy to build VPN between these two devices. 1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor2926 series. 2. Open Central Management>> VPN >>CPE Management. 3. Click the device icon (marked with 4. Wait for a moment. If VPN is built successfully, related information will be displayed on CPE VPN Connection List.
5. A LAN to LAN profile for such VPN will be generated automatically. You can access into VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN of the remote device for viewing the detailed information. Note: The profile name is created automatically by the system. Do not modify any value in such page to avoid VPN error.
A-3 CVM Application - How to upgrade CPE firmware through Vigor2926 series? Download the newest firmware from your Draytek website to USB Storage Disk for the device (e.g., Vigor2850) managed by Vigor2926 series. Vigor2850, as an example, is chosen for Vigor2926 to perform the CPE firmware upgrade remotely in this case. 1. Plug in USB storage disk onto Vigor2926 series via USB interface. Make sure the USB disk has been installed correctly, otherwise, the firmware upgrade will not be successful. 2.
4. The Maintenance profile dialog appears. In the field of Profile Name, type a name for such maintenance profile; check Enable; and choose the one you want to perform firmware upgrade from Device Name drop down list. From the Action Type, choose Firmware Upgrade. Type the file/path of the newest firmware or click Select to locate it. Specify the Schedule profile. At last, click OK. 586 5. Now, a new maintenance profile has been created. 6.
8. Then check the device information for the managed device if the firmware upgrade is successful or not. Click Managed Devices List. Click the icon of Vigor2850 and click Edit and view the software version. Another way to check if the firmware upgrade is completed or not, simply open Central Management>>VPN>>Log & Alert.
VII-6 Central Management (AP) Vigor2926 can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP Management. AP Map AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first.
Web User Interface VII-6-1 Dashboard This page shows VigorAP’s information about Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number by displaying VigorAP icon, text and histogram. Just move and click your mouse cursor on Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number. Corresponding web pages will be open immediately.
To access into the web user interface of VigorAP, simply move your mouse cursor on the VigorAP icon and click it. The system will guide you to access into the web user interface of VigorAP. VII-6-2 Status This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption, channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router. Please open Central Management>>AP>>Function Support List to check what AP Models are supported.
VII-6-3 WLAN Profile WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface of the access point. Click the number link of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Display the link of the profile. Name Display the name of the profile. The default profile cannot be renamed.
Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field. Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then, click OK. The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot. To Local 592 WLAN Profile configured in this page is specified for VigorAP connected to Vigor router. If required, these settings also can be applied to Vigor router.
How to edit the wireless LAN profile? 1. Check the box on the left side of the selected profile. 2. Click the Edit button to display the following page. Info Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile.
3. After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page for 2.4G wireless security settings.
4. After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page for 5G wireless security settings. 5. When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.
VII-6-4 AP Maintenance Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point. Info Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions (e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor2926.
Select Device and Selected Device areas. Selected Device Display the access points that will be applied by such function after clicking OK. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action. VII-6-5 AP Map This function is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first.
Creating /Editing the AP Map Profile 1. Select a number index and click Edit to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 2. 598 Item Description Location (Profile Name) Type a name (e.g., groudfloor) for the AP map profile. Upload Map Click the Select button to choose an image file (only JPG and PNG are supported) for floor plan. Cancel Click it to cancel the configuration. Next Click it to go to the next configuration page. Click Next.
3. Follow the instruction listed on the web page to draw a red line for length / width. Then, type the value on the pop up dialog to determine the real distance. The values for length and width will be displayed on the web page. 4. Click Next to open the web page of Planning. Available APs detected by Vigor router will be displayed on the upper end.
5. 600 Select the AP you need; drag and drop an AP icon from upper end to the map on the bottom.
6. Check the box of Show AP Coverage and choose 2.4GHz or 5GHz of wireless signal for the AP located on the floor plan. 7. Adjust the AP on the map to find out which place can have the best wireless coverage. At last, click Save.
VII-6-6 Traffic Graph Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time. The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in kbps). Info 602 Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External Devices function.
VII-6-7 Rogue AP Detection It displays the access point scanned by Vigor router. In which, the APs will be classified with friendly APs, rogue APs and unknown APs in different colors. Below shows the detected APs by clicking OK. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Neighbor AP Detection – The access point(s) registered to Vigor2926 will be used to detect other access points and send the scanned results to Vigor2926.
will be displayed on this page. Local WLAN Detection – The router will detect all the access points through wireless LAN connection. Specify the access points which are classified under each type. Refresh Min(s) Use the drop down list to specify the time to refresh the web page. Refresh Click such link to refresh the web page immediately. Ch Display the channel used by the detected access point. SSID Display the SSID specified for the detected access point.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description AP’s MAC Address The MAC address of the selected AP will be displayed here automatically. AP’s SSID The SSID of the selected AP will be displayed here automatically. Add to Friendly APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as Friendly AP, simply click Add to change its classification from unknown to Friendly. Rogue APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as rogue AP, simply click Add to change its classification from unknown to Rogue.
VII-6-8 Event Log Time and event log for all of the APs managed by Vigor router will be shown on this page. It is userful for troubleshooting if required. VII-6-9 Total Traffic Such page will display the total traffic of data receiving and data transmitting for VigorAPs managed by Vigor router.
VII-6-10 Station Number The total number of the wireless clients will be shown on this page, no matter what mode of wireless connection (2.4G WLAN or 5G WLAN) used by wireless clients to access into Internet through VigorAP. VII-6-11 Load Balance The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.
Disable – Disable the function of AP load balance. By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be executed based on the station number configured in this page. It is used to limit the allowed number for the station connecting to the access point. The purpose is to prevent lots of stations connecting to access point at the same time and causing traffic unbalanced. Please define the required station number for WLAN (2.4GHz) and WLAN (5GHz) separately.
Application Notes A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2926) to check AP status and deploy WLAN profile The administrator can manage the access points linked to Vigor2926. 1. Open External Devices>>Access Point Devices. Vigor2926 will detect the AP connecting to the router automatically and display as below: In this case, a device named with AP800_00507F6EE4980 has been detected by Vigor router. 2. Click the WLAN Profile tab to get the following page.
Info 4. 610 Apply to All APs can automatically apply the settings on Default profile to all of the access points registered to Vigor2926 later. Hence, it is not necessary for you to manually apply wireless profiles for APs respectively. Such feature will be convenient for people who want to quickly deploy multiple Vigor APs in a large exhibition to reach the goal of “plug and play” and “zero-configuration”. The following page allows you to modify related settings for 2.4G SSID of managed AP.
5. The following page is offered for you to modify related settings for 5G SSID of managed AP. Continue to make any changes you want. After finished all of the changes, simply click Finish. 6. Now, the AP (represented with AP800_00507F6EE4980) detected by Vigor router will be applied with the settings modified by Vigor router.
VII-7 Central Management (Switch) Vigor router can manage lots of VigorSwitch devices connected to it. Through profile and group settings, the administrator can execute configuration backup, restore for VigorSwitch device, reboot the device or return to factory default settings of VigorSwitch at one time.
Web User Interface VII-7-1 Status VII-7-1-1 Switch Status Such page displays information, including Group, Switch name, IP address, model, System Up Time, Port in Use, Clients, and Firmware Version of VigorSwitch connected to Vigor2926 series. Before checking the switch status, go to Central Management>>External Device to enable External Device Auto Discovery. Wait for the system to display available device(s). Later, open Central Management>>Switch>>Status.
VigorSwitch listed below Status means the switch is managed by Viogr router; VigorSwitch listed below New Switch List means it is not managed by Vigor router yet. Available settings are explained as follows: 614 Item Description Group Display the name link of the group. You can click the link to modify the group settings if required. Switch Name Display the name link of VigorSwitch. You can click the name link to access into the switch profile. IP Address Display the IP address of VigorSwitch.
It will be better to group VigorSwitch devices with the same model.
VII-7-1-2 Switch Hierarchy Such page displays the hierarchy of VigorSwitch(es) managed under Vigor2926. Please note that, Shutdown Port is available for LAN port of VigorSwitch connects to a LAN device. When it is checked, after clicking OK, the network connection between that device and VigorSwitch will be terminated.
VII-7-1-3 Detailed Info Such page displays the general information (e.g., name, IP address, model name and MAC address) for VigorSwitch(es) managed under Vigor2926.
VII-7-2 Profile This page will show general information, such as name, group, IP address, MAC address, model and password of VigorSwitch only when it connects to Vigor2926 series. By clicking the index number link, a profile setting page for that switch will be shown. Note that each profile represents one VigorSwitch. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Click the number link to access into the switch profile. Note: Each connected VigorSwitch will have one setting profile.
Available settings are explained as follows: 2. Item Description Switch Name Type a name for the Switch. The purpose of name is used for identification. It is useful when there are many VigorSwitch (same modes) devices connecting to Vigor2926 seres. Comment Type the text in such field if additional explanation for the switch is required. Trap Community Name Define the community name of SNMP trap between Vigor router and VigorSwitch.
Setting page with LAN>>VLAN configured previously: 3. 620 Click Save to save VLAN configuration.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Description If required, type a brief description to explain the device connected to VigorSwitch via the LAN port. Port Control Vigor router can enable, disable or activate LAN port by schedule. Schedule It is available when By Schedule is selected as Port Control. Two sechule profiles can be specified here to force Vigor3220 executing specific action to VigorSwitch.
4. Click OK to save the changes and then click Send to Device. Settings will be sent to VigorSwitch immediately. VII-7-3 Group Different switches can be classified into different group(s). Specifc password for a group can be defined and applied to every switch uder that group. Through the common password setting, it is not necessary for the system administrator to remember various login passwords to access into different VigorSwitch devices. Click any index number link to create a new switch group.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Group Name Type a name as the group name. Different switches can be classified within a group. Group Password Type a password that administrator can use to access into the managed VigorSwitch connecting to Vigor2926 series. All of the switches under the same group can be accessed into via such group password. Existing Switch Display all of the VigorSwitch devices connecting to Vigor2926.
VII-7-4 Maintenance Such feature can execute configuration backup, restore of selected VigorSwitch device(s) or reboot the VigorSwitch devices remotely or reset the VigorSwitch devices with factory default settings, without accessing into the web user interface of VigorSwitch respectively. It is convenient for system administrator to manage VigorSwitch devices.
VII-7-5 Alert and Log Alert and Log is helpful for the user to understand the abnormal situation occurred in VigorSwitch quickly. When the system detects an error, information of abnormal condition will be recorded to the database; or the system will send an alert to the specified device (via e-mail or SMS) to warn the user.
Alert and Log Check it to enable this feature. Alert Levels and Action Level Name – Define names for representing the severity of alert event. The default names for index 1 to index 4 will be shown on each setting box. Index 5 to index 8 are reserved for user-defined. Color – Define the color for each level of alert. However, the color of index 1 is No color and unable to be changed. Create Log – Check the box to create log of alert. Such log will be seen on Alert Logs page.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Switch Alert When VigorSwitch encounters the following alert events, alert mechanism will perform corresponding actions based on the servity level of the incident encountererd. Incident – At present, Cold Start, Warm Start, Disconnect and Reconnect will be treated as alert events. Level – Specify the severity level for each incident.
VII-7-5-3 Alert Logs The user can get the information by filtering the collective information based on the conditions specified in this page. Available settings are explained as follows: 628 Item Description Select Columns to Filter Logs Level – The alert can be divided into four levels, No Alert, Minor Alert, Moderate Alert and Major Alert. Check the one(s) you want to check in Alert Logs list. Type – Check the type (switch / port) of the log to be displayed in Alert Logs list.
VII-7-6 Database Setup The database of switch can be used to record alert logs and traffic history. This page is used to determine if it is necessary for the user information to be recorded in the database of switch. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Database to Record alert logs and traffic history Check the box to make the database (in USB disk) to record the alert logs and traffic history.
VII-7-7 Support List This page lists all models of VigorSwitch which can be managed by Vigor2926 via Central Management>>Switch.
VII-8 Central Management (External Devices) Vigor router can be used to connect with many types of external devices. In order to control or manage the external devices conveniently, open External Devices to make detailed configuration. VII-8-1 All Devices Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description External Device Syslog Check this box to display information of the detected device on Syslog.
When you finished the configuration, click OK to save it. Info 632 Only DrayTek products can be detected by this function.
Part VIII Others Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM. USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications.
VIII-1 Objects Settings Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
Web User Interface VIII-1-1 IP Object For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address). You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows: 636 Item Description View Use the drop down list to choose a type (Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address, Mac Address or all) that IP object with the selected type will be shown on this page. Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Search Type a string of the IP object that you want to search. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the object profile.
Backup the current IP Objects with a CSV file – Click it to backup current IP objecsts as a CSV file. Such file can be restored for future use. Download the default CSV template to edit – After clicking it, press Download to store the default CSM template (a table without any input data) to your hard disk. Download – Download the CSV file from Vigor router and store in your hard disk. Restore IP Object Select – Click it to specify a predefined CSV file.
IP address. Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address. Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address. 4. 638 MAC Address Type the MAC address of the network card which will be controlled. Start IP Address Type the start IP address for Single Address type. End IP Address Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is selected. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.
VIII-1-2 IP Group This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP objects with the specified interface. Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box. Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address. Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address only.
VIII-1-4 IPv6 Group This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available IPv6 Objects All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box. Selected IPv6 Objects Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 644 Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to. Source/Destination Port Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available for TCP/UDP protocol.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration. VIII-1-6 Service Type Group This page allows you to bind several service types into one group. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. 646 Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available Service Type Objects All the available service objects that you have added on Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this box.
VIII-1-7 Keyword Object You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web Content Filter Profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the object profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. 648 Item Description Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Contents Type the content for such profile. For example, type gambling as Contents.
VIII-1-8 Keyword Group This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available Keyword Objects You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page within one keyword group. All the available Keyword objects that you have created will be shown in this box. Selected Keyword Objects 3. Click this box. button to add the selected Keyword objects in After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 7 characters. Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be processed in the router.
VIII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object SMS Service Object This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert Service. Each item is explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Profile Display the name for such SMS profile. SMS Provider Display the service provider which offers SMS service.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. Service Provider Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which offers SMS service. Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.
Customized SMS Service Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index 10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed. You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details. Available settings are explained as follows: 654 Item Description Profile Name Display the name of this profile.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the password you can set is 31 characters. Quota Type the total number of the messages that the router will send out. Sending Interval Type the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 656 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. SMTP Server Type the IP address of the mail server. SMTP Port Type the port number for SMTP server.
Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out. 3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VIII-1-11 Notification Object This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert Service. You can set an object with different monitoring situation. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Category Display the types that will be monitored. Status Display the status for the category. You can check the box to be monitored. For example, the check box of CPE firmware upgrade fail under the category of Central VPN Management is checked.
VIII-1-12 String Object This page allows you to set string profiles which will be applied in route policy (domain name selection for destination), hotspot web portal and etc. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index no. Click it to open the following page for adding a new string object. Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all of the settings in this page. Index Display the number link of the string profile. String Display the string defined.
VIII-1-13 Country Object The country object profile can determine which country/countries shall be blocked by the Vigor router’s Firewall. The country object, by grouping IP addresses for multiple countries, can be applied by other functions such as router policy destination (refer to the following figure for example).
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Open Object Setting>>Country Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for such profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Available Country / Selected Country Select any country from Available Country.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Application Notes A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN Disconnection Follow the steps listed below: 1. Log into the web user interface of Vigor router. 2. Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to get the following page. Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider.
664 4. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting. 5. Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the notification. 6. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending the SMS.
7. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the configuration of the notification object profile setting. 8. Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS). 9. Click OK to save the settings.
Remark: How the customize the SMS Provider Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify for sending SMS out.
VIII-2 USB Application USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications. After setting the configuration in USB Application, you can type the IP address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User Management on the client software.
Web User Interface VIII-2-1 USB General Settings This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP server and enable SMB service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32.
SMB File Sharing Service Click Enable to invoke SMB service (file sharing) via the router. Access Mode LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the SMB server of the router. LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access SMB server of the router. NetBios Name Service For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check it to activate this profile (account) for FTP service or SMB file sharing service. Later, the user can use the username specified in this page to login into FTP server. Username Type the username for FTP/SMB users for accessing into FTP server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access into USB storage disk in anonymity.
Access Rule It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must follow the rule specified here. File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such profile. Directory –Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for such profile. Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB storage disk into the USB interface of the Vigor router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.
Upload Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB storage disk. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be shared for other user through FTP. VIII-2-4 USB Device Status This page is to monitor the status for USB device connecting to Vigor router. . In addition, the status of the USB modem or USB printer or USB sensor connecting to Vigor router can be checked from such page. If you want to remove the storage disk from USB port in router, please click Disconnect USB Disk first.
VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor A USB Thermometer is now available. It complements your installed DrayTek router installations which will help you monitor the server or data communications room environment and notify you if the server room or data communications room is overheating. During summer in particular, it is important to ensure that your server or data communications equipment are not overheating due to cooling system failures.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Settings Temperature Calibration - Type a value used for correcting the temperature error. Temperature Unit - Choose the display unit of the temperature. There are two types for you to choose. Alarm Settings Enable Syslog Alarm - The temperature log will be recorded on Syslog if it is enabled. Upper temperature limit/Lower temperature limit - Type the upper limit and lower limit for the system to send out temperature alert.
VIII-2-6 Modem Support List Such page provides the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.
VIII-2-7 SMB Client Support List SMB Client Support List provides the test status information for applications with file sharing operated under different platforms.
Application Notes A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router? Files on USB storage device can be reviewed by opening USB Applicaiton>>File Explorer. If it is necessary for you to delete, copy files on the device or write, paste files to the devcie, it must be done through SMB server or FTP server. SMB service is based on the original USB FTP service. You will need to setup USB FTP first. We would like to give brief instructions on USB FTP setup here. 1.
678 3. Setup a user account for the FTP service by using USB Application >>USB User Management. Click Enable to enable FTP/SMB User account. Here we add a new account "user1" and assign authorities “Read”, “Write” and “List” to it. 4. Click OK to save the configuration. 5. Make sure the FTP service is running properly. Please open a browser and type ftp://192.168.1.1. Use the account "user1" to login.
6. When the following screen appears, it means the FTP service is running properly. 7. Return to USB Application >> USB Disk Status. The information for FTP server will be shown as below. Now, users in LAN of Vigor2926 can access into the USB storage device by typing ftp://192.168.1.1 on any browser. They can add or remove files / directories, depending on the Access Rule for FTP account settings in USB Application >>USB User Management.
This page is left blank.
Part IX Troubleshooting This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration.
IX-1 Diagnostics This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage. Checking if the hardware status is OK or not. Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not. Pinging the router from your computer. Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.
Web User Interface Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router. IX-1-1 Dial-out Triggering Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.
IX-1-2 Routing Table Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 684 Item Description Refresh Click it to reload the page.
IX-1-3 ARP Cache Table Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Show Specify LAN and VLAN to display related information. In default, this page will display all of the information about LAN and VLAN. Refresh Click it to reload the page.
IX-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6 address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc. Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 686 Item Description Refresh Click it to reload the page.
IX-1-5 DHCP Table The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc. Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index It displays the connection item number. IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified PC.
IX-1-6 NAT Sessions Table Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page. Available settings are explained as follows: 688 Item Description Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC. #Pseudo Port It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT. Peer IP:Port It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote host. Interface It displays the representing number for different interface. Refresh Click it to reload the page.
IX-1-7 DNS Cache Table Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page. The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS Cache Table. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window. Refresh Click it to reload the page. When an entry’s TTL is larger than….
IX-1-8 Ping Diagnosis Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page. or Available settings are explained as follows: 690 Item Description IPV4 /IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.
by the router automatically. Ping to Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you want to ping. IP Address Type the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping. Ping IPv6 Address Type the IPv6 address that you want to ping. Run Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be displayed on the screen. Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
Available settings are explained as follows: 692 Item Description Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function. Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically. Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually. Index Display the number of the data flow. IP Address Display the IP address of the monitored device. TX rate (kbps) Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.
Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking. APP QoS Use the drop down list to change the priority in data transmission for the specified IP address (host). Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate for WAN interface. Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in data transmission.
IX-1-10 Traffic Graph Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Bandwidth, Sessions, Ping Detect, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted) data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time. The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings.
IX-1-11 VPN Graph Click Diagnostics and click VPN Graph to open the web page.
IX-1-12 Trace Route Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen. or Available settings are explained as follows: 696 Item Description IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it. Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want to ping through.
Protocol Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want to ping through. Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host. Trace Host/IP Address It indicates the IPv6 address of the host. Run Click this button to start route tracing work. Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window. IX-1-13 Syslog Explorer Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.
Export Click this link to save the data as a file. Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually. Clear Click this link to clear information on this page. Display Mode There are two modes for you to choose. Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of syslog is full, the system will stop recording. Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system. Time Display the time of the event occurred. Message Display the information for each event.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually. IX-1-15 High Availability Status All of the routers under the same DARP (DrayTek Address resolution Protocol) group can be viewed in such page. However, only partial information of the router status will be displayed.
Refresh Click it to get the newest status of the primary router. Status “!” means an error has occurred. Refer to Detailed information and modify HA settings if required. Router Name Display the name of the device. IPv4 Display the IPv4 address of such router. State “Down” means the function of HA is disabled. “Primary” means such router stands for the primary router in HA. “Secondary” means such router stands for the secondary router in HA.
IX-1-16 Authentication Information Authentication User List Such page displays authentication jobs made by Internal RADIUS or Local 802.1X. When the mouse cursor moves to the name link under User Name, the connection message (including authentication failed information) about internal RADIUS or local 802.1X service will be shown by a popped up dialog box. Authentication Information Log This page will display the complete authentication log information.
IX-1-17 DoS Flood Table This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism. It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection. Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.
IX-1-18 Route Policy Diagnosis With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced. or Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy.
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port. Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page.. Input File It is available when Analyze multiple packets.. is selected as Mode. Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for saving the result of analysis. Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page.
IX-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status. 1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections. Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details. 2. Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent LAN LED is bright. 3. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to “I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try again.
IX-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure the network connection settings is OK. For Windows Info 706 The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in www.DrayTek.com. 1.
4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. 5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically. Finally, click OK.
For Mac OS 708 1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop. 2. Open the Application folder and get into Network. 3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.
IX-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP automatically. (Please refer to the previous section IX-3) Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.
IX-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed on section 1.2) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please: Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex). Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL/FTTX(GPON)/Cable modem) offered by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router. Check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.
IX-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection When you have trouble in using 3G/4G network transmission, please check the following: Check if USB LED lights on or off You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G/4G USB Modem into your Vigor2926. Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails, restart Vigor2926.
IX-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only. Info After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing. The password of factory default is null. Software Reset You can reset the router to factory default via Web page.
Part X Telnet Commands Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide 713
Accessing Telnet of Vigor2926 This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual. Info For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs. Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later. In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter.
For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.
716 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: bpa This command allows to configure a network setting specified for Australia’s ISP. Syntax bpa m [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description m Available settings are 1 and 2. -a 1/0 to enable/disable this entry -n contact UserName(max. 24 characters) -p contact PassWord (max. 24 characters) -s
Telnet Command: csm appe prof Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application. “csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Telnet Command: csm appe show It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile. csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m] Syntax Description Parameter Description -a View the configuration status for All groups. -i View the configuration status of IM group. -p View the configuration status of P2P group. -t View the configuration status of protocol group. -m View the configuration status of Others group.
OTHERS OTHERS OTHERS OTHERS OTHERS OTHERS OTHERS TUNNEL TUNNEL TUNNEL TUNNEL TUNNEL TUNNEL TUNNEL 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 HTTP Proxy HTTP Tunnel Hamachi Hotspot Shield MS Teredo PGPNet Ping Tunnel Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable . . . -----------------------------------------------------------------Total 66 APPs > Telnet Command: csm appe interface It is used to configure APPE signature download interface.
Telnet Command: csm appe email It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert). csm appe email [-e|-d|-s] Syntax Description Parameter Description -e Enable notification e-mail mechanism. -d Disable notification e-mail mechanism. -s Send an example e-mail. Example > csm appe email -e Enable APPE email.
VALUE Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions. 0: It means Bundle: Pass. 1: It means Bundle: Block. 2: It means Either: URL Access Control First. 3: It means Either: Web Feature First. -l It means the log type of the profile. They are: P: Pass, B: Block, A: All, N: None MSG It means to specify the Administration Message, less then 255 characters uac It means to set URL Access Control part. wf It means to set Web Feature part.
-v It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM profile. -e It means to enable the function of URL Access Control. -d It means to disable the function of URL Access Control. -a Set the action of specific application, P or B. B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be blocked. P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed. -i Prevent the web access from any IP address. E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will be blocked.
Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX wf It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf). Syntax csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index Syntax Description Parameter Description INDEX It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.
[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature Action:[pass] File Extension Object Index : [0] [V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload Profile Name : [] Telnet Command: csm wcf It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).
P: Pass, B: Block, A: All, N: None 726 -o Set the keyword object. KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile. -g Set the keyword group. KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile. -w It means to set the action for the black and white list. E:Enable, D:Disable, P:Pass, B:Block -s It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP. -u It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
Example > csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[test_wcf] []White/Black list Action:[block] No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME Syntax Description Parameter Description enable Enable or disable DNS Filter. ON: enable. OFF: disable. syslog Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog. P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. N: None.
Telnet Command: ddns enable This command allows users to enable or disable the DDNS service. Syntax ddns enable [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description 0/1 0 – Disable the DDNS service. 1 – Enable the DDNS service. Example > ddns enable 1 Enable Dynamic DNS Setup > Telnet Command: ddns set This command allows users to set Dynamica DNS account.
[value]: limit up to 60 characters -R [value] It means to type Determine Real WAN IP. [value]: 0: WAN IP, 1: Internet IP -S [value] It means to specify Servive Provider. If user want to set User-Defined page, value must select 1. [value]: value must be between 1-19. 1 >> User-Defined 2 >> 3322 DDNS (www.3322.org) 3 >> ChangeIP.com (www.changeip.com) 4 >> ddns.com.cn (www.ddns.com.cn) 5 >> DtDNS (www.dtdns.com) 6 >> dyn.com (www.dyn.com) 7 >> DynAccess (www.dynaccess.com) 8 >> dynami.co.za (www.dynami.co.
Telnet Command: ddns log Displays the DDNS log. Example > ddns log > ddns log2017-09-04 04:43:46.5 >>>>> DDNS is updating. <<<<<2017-09-04 04:43:05.6 >>>>> DDNS is updating. <<<<< Telnet Command: ddns time Sets and displays the DDNS time. Syntax ddns time [update in minutes] Syntax Description Parameter Description Update in minutes Type the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400.
Syntax ddns show -i [value] Syntax Description Parameter Description -I [value] Display the content of selected DDNS account. [value]: value must be between 1-6 Example > ddns show -i 1 -------------------------------------------------Index: 1 [ ] Enable Dynamic DNS Account WAN Interface: WAN1 First Service Provider: dyn.com (www.dyn.com) Service Type: Dynamic Domain Name: [].
-e It means to enable defense function for a specific attack(s). ATTACK_0 It means to specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle. -d It means to disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).
n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting) n=1: PAP Only 734 -t n It means to set connection duration and n means different conditions. n=-1: Always-on n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds) -i It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here for CPE (PPPoE client). If you type 0.0.0.0 as the , ISP will assign suitable IP address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router will use that one as a fixed IP.
-L n Set (PPP mode) WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value. -E Set (DHCP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters). -G Set (DHCP mode) Network Mode. 0: 4G/3G/2G; 1: 4G Only; 2: 3G Only; 3: 2G Only -N Set (DHCP mode) APN Name (max. 47 characters) -U n (DHCP mode) MTU(1000-1440) Example >internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: ip pubaddr This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router. Syntax ip pubaddr ? ip pubaddr Syntax Description Parameter Description ? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet IP address. public subnet IP address Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you specified as the public subnet IP address. Example > ip pubaddr ? % ip addr % Now: 192.168.0.1 > ip pubaddr 192.168.2.
ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool][wanX] ip aux remove [index] Syntax Description Parameter Description add It means to create a new WAN IP address. remove It means to delete an existed WAN IP address. IP It means the auxiliary WAN IP address. Join to NAT Pool 0 (disable) or 1 (enable). wanX Add or remove an address for WAN interface. index Type the index number of the table displayed on your screen. Example > ip aux add 192.168.1.65 1 % 192.168.1.65 has added in index 2.
Example >ip addr 192.168.50.1 % Set IP address OK !!! Info When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP server.
Parameter Description IP address It means the LAN IP address. MAC address It means the MAC address of your router. LAN or WAN It indicates the direction for the arp function. 0/1/2/3/4/5 0: disable to accept illegal source mac address 1: enable to accept illegal source mac address 2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address 3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address 4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table 5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table status: display the setting status.
-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable -w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1) -c: set option number: 0~255 -v: set option value by string -x: set option value by raw byte (hex) -u: update by index number release It means to release current WAN IP address. renew It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another new one. status It displays current status of DHCP client.
Telnet Command: ip tracert This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host. Syntax ip tracert [Host/IP address] [WAN1/WAN2] [Udp/Icmp] Syntax Description Parameter Description IP address It means the target IP address. WAN1/WAN2 It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes through. Udp/Icmp It means the UDP or ICMP. Example >ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1 Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max 1 172.16.3.7 10ms 2 172.16.1.2 10ms 3 Request Time out. 4 168.95.90.
Parameter Description 0/1/2 0 means disable; 1 means first subnet and 2 means second subnet. Example > ip rip 1 %% Set RIP 1st subnet.
Telnet Command: ip wanrip This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP. Syntax ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description ifno It means the connection interface. 1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5 Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs. -e It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN interface. 1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP. 0: Disable the function.
Telnet Command: ip route This command allows users to set static route. Syntax ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype] ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype] ip route status ip route cnc ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?] ip route clean [1/0] Syntax Description Parameter Description add It means to add an IP address as static route. del It means to delete specified IP address. status It means current status of static route. dst It means the IP address of the destination.
Telnet Command: ip igmp_proxy This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server. Syntax ip igmp_proxy set ip igmp_proxy reset ip igmp_proxy wan ip igmp_proxy t_home[on/off/show/help] ip igmp_proxy query ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1] ip igmp_proxy status Syntax Description Parameter Description set It means to enable proxy server. reset It means to disable proxy server. wan It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service. t_home It means to specify t_home proxy server for using.
ip igmp_snoop disable ip igmp_snoop status ip igmp_snoop table ip igmp_snoop txquery ip igmp_snoop mode ip igmp_snoop chkleave ip igmp_snoop separate ip igmp_snoop portchk Syntax Description Parameter Description enable It means to enable igmp snoop function disable It means to disable igmp snoop function. status It means to display current igmp configuration. table It means to display current configuration of igmp. txquery It means to send out IGMP QUERY to LAN periodically.
Telnet Command: ip igmp_fl This command allows users to activate IGMP fast leave and display current status for IGMP fast leave. Syntax ip igmp_fl enable ip igmp_fl disable ip igmp_fl status Syntax Description Parameter Description enable / disable It means to enable / disable the function of IGMP fast leave. status It menas to show current status of IGMP fast leave. Example > ip igmp_snoop enable %% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.
ip dmzswitch trueip ip dmzswitch active_trueip Syntax Description Parameter Description off It means to turn off DMZ function. private It means to set DMZ with private IP. trueip It means to set DMZ with true IP. active_trueip It means to set the DMZ with active true IP.
IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command. num It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100. p2pnum It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 50 for P2P. Example >ip session default 100 > ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50 > ip session on > ip session status IP range: 192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.
> ip bandwidth default 200 800 > ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60 > ip bandwidth status IP range: 192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off Auto adjustment is off Telnet Command: ip bindmac This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.
Telnet Command: ip bgp This command allows users to configure settings for BGP. Syntax ip bgp mode [0/1] ip bgp as [value] ip bgp hold [value] ip bgp retry [value] ip bgp id [value] ip bgp show ip bgp neighbor [idx] mode [0/1] ip bgp neighbor [idx] name [max len: 20] ip bgp neighbor [idx] ip [x.x.x.
characters. neighbor ip It means to set the IP address specified for the neighboring router. : Available profile number is between 1 and 8. : Type the IP address, e.g., 100.100.100.100. neighbor as <1~4294967295> It means to set the AS number for the neightboring router. : Available profile number is between 1 and 8. : Available number is between 1 and 4294967295. neighbor show It means to display information for the specified profile.
Telnet Command: ip maxnatuser This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users. Syntax ip maxnatuser user no Syntax Description Parameter Description User no A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router supports. 0 – It means no limitation. Example > ip maxnatuser 100 % Max NAT user = 100 Telnet Command: ip policy_rt This command is used to set the IP policy route profile. Syntax ip policy_rt [- | ...
Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port. -G [default/specific] Specify the gateway mode. -L [default/specific] Specify the failover gateway mode. -s [value] Indicate the source IP start. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0) -S [value] Indicate the source IP end. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.100) -d [value] Indicate the destination IP start. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.2.
1: Enable the function of “failback”. -v: View current failback setting. Diagnose for Policy Route -s [value] It means “source IP”. Value: Available settings include: Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address. “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0). -d [value] It means “destination IP”. Value : Available settings include: Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address. “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: Specify an IP address.
0: disable 1: enable -i It means to create LAN DNS profile with specified domain name. profile setting index number : type the index number which represents the profile with domain name configured. -l It means to list detailed information of profile configuration. > ip lanDNSRes -l % % Idx: 7 % State: Enable % Profile: DrayTekFTP % Domain Name: ftp.draytek.com % -------- Address Mapping Table -------% Idx ReplyOnlySameSubnet IP Address % 1 Yes 172.16.2.10 % 2 Yes 172.16.3.
|…] […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -a Set forwarded DNS server IP Address. -d Delete the selected LAN DNS profile. -e <0/1> 0: disable such function. 1: enable such function. -i Type the index number of the profile. -l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message). -n Set domain name.
Example > ip6 addr -a LAN Unicast Address: FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link) Multicast Address: FF02::2 FF02::1:FF00:0 FF02::1 Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp req_opt This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client. Syntax ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description req_opt It means option-request. LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
> Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp client This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server. Syntax ip6 dhcp client [WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description client It means the dhcp client settings. [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status. -i It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool. -x It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool. -d It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address. -D It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address. -c It means to send rapid commit to server. 1: Enable 0: Disable -e It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.
n=7:6rd [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -m n It means to set IPv6 MTU. N = any value (0 means “unspecified”). -u It means to set Username. = type a name as the username (maximum 63 characters). -p It means to set Password. = type a password (maximum 63 characters). -s It means to set Tunnel Server IP.
Telnet Command: ip6 neigh This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table. Syntax ip6 neigh -s[ inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2] Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to add a neighbour. -d It means to delete a neighbour. -a It means to show neighbour status. inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address eth_addr Type submask address. LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the neighbor.
Telnet Command: ip6 pneigh This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour. Syntax ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2] Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to add a proxy neighbour. -d It means to delete a proxy neighbour. -a It means to show proxy neighbour status. inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.
PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_ I/F METRIC STATE FLAGS -----------------------------------------------------------------------FE80::/128 0 0 UNICAST U LAN 0 UNICAST U LAN 256 UNICAST U LAN 1024 UNICAST UGA 0 UNICAST UC LAN 256 UNICAST U LAN -1 :: FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128 0 LAN :: FE80::/64 0 FE80::/16 0 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 FF02::1/128 LAN 0 FF02::1 FF00::/8 0 ::/0 UNREACHABLE ! 0 Telnet Command: ip6 ping This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a
Telnet Command: ip6 tracert This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host. Syntax ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host] Syntax Description Parameter Description IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
Status: Connected > Telnet Command: ip6 radvd This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server. Syntax Ip6 radvd –s [1|0] [lifetime] ip6 radvd –V Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD server. 1: Enable the RADVD server. 0: Disable the RADVD server. Lifetime It means to set the lifetime. The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds. It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix.
add It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute management through Internet. index It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6 management. prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing Internet. prefix-length It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix. remove It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6 settings. flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table.
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % Tx packets = 408, Tx bytes = 32160, Rx packets = 428, Rx bytes = 33636 > ip6 online 1 % WAN 1 online status : % IPv6 WAN1 Disabled % Default Gateway : :: % UpTime : 0:00:00 % Interface : DOWN % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0 Telnet Command: ip6 aiccu This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of AICCU.
Syntax ip6 ntp –h ip6 ntp –v ip6 ntp –p [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description –h It is used to display the usage of such command. -v It is used to show the NTP state. -p <0/1> It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6. 0 – Auto 1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server. Example > ip6 ntp -p 1 % Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First Telnet Command: ip6 lan This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for LAN interface. Syntax ip6 lan -l n [- | ...
when management is DHCPv6) n=0: Disable n=1: Enable. -e n It means to add an extension WAN. n: 1: WAN1, 2: WAN2, ... x: WANx. -E n It means to delete an extension WAN. n: 1: WAN1 ,2: WAN2, ... x: WANx. -b map It means to set bit map(decimal) for extension WAN. map: bit 0: WAN1 bit 1: WAN2, ... bit n: WAN(n+1). -f n It means to disable IPv6. n= 1: Disable IPv6, n=0: Enable IPv6. -R n It means to enable /disable RIPng. n=1: Enable RIPng, n=0: Disable RIPng. -s n It means to show IPv6 LAN setting.
% % % % % % % % % Static IP(2) Static IP(3) DNS1 DNS2 ULA Type RIPng [ifno: 0, enable: 0] : ::/0 [ifno: 0, enable: 0] : ::/0 [ifno: 0, enable: 0] : 2001:4860:4860::8888 : 2001:4860:4860::8844 : OFF : Enable Telnet Command: ip6 session This command allows you to set sessions limit for IPv6 address. Syntax ip6 session [on/off/default num/status/show] ip6 session [add/del] [IP1-IP2] [num] Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to turn on session limit for each IP.
Parameter Description on It means to turn on bandwidth limit for each IP. off It means to turn off bandwidth limit for each IP. default It means to set the default transmission (tx), receiving (rx) rate of bandwidth limit (0-30000 Kbps/Mbps). status It means to display the current settings. show It means to display all IP range bandwidth limit settings. add It means to add the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range. - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1 Running: yes Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip Default: pass all, Logging: available Telnet Command: ipf set This command is used to set general rule for firewall. Syntax ipf set [Options] ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options] Syntax Description Parameter Description Options There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c [SET_NO], -d [SET_NO],… and etc. SET_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set.
Setting saved. > ipf set -d 2 #set data filter start from set 2 Setting saved.
o - indicates “object”. g - indicates “group”. obj - indicates index number of object or index number of group. Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-s g 3" means the third source IP group profile. –s u
| It means to configure source IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask. u – It means “user defined”. Address Type - Type the number (representing different address type).: 2 – Port OP, range is 0-3, 0:==, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:< 4 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is 1-65535. 6 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535. 776 -F It means the Filter action you can specify. 0 –Pass Immediately, 1 – Block Immediately, 2 – Pass if no further match, 3 – Block if no further match. -q It means the classification for QoS. 1– Class 1, 2 – Class 2, 3 – Class 3, 4 – Other -l It means load balance policy.
Example > ipf rule 2 1 -e 1 -s "o 1" -d "o 2" -S "o 1" -F 2 > ipf rule 2 1 -v Filter Set 2 Rule 1: Status : Enable Comments: xNetBios -> DNS Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: , , , Direction : LAN -> WAN Source IP : Group1, Destination IP: Group2, Service Type : TCP/UDPGroup1, Fragments : Don't Care Pass or Block : Block Immediately Branch to Other Filter Set: None Max Sessions Limit : 32000 Current Sessions : 0 Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict Qos Class : None APP Enforcement : None URL Conte
-e It means to enable or disable the flowtrack. -f It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do not specify any IP address, then all the session state of flowtrack will be displayed. -b It means to show all of IP sessions state. - i [IP address] It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55). -p[value] It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024). Available settings are 0 ~ 65535. -t [value] It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp).
[ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -m [value] It means to set ICMP, UDP or TCP as flowtest mode. Value – 1, 2 or 3. In which, 1: ICMP 2: UDP 3: TCP -d [value] It means to set the original direction Value – 1 or 2. In which, 1: LAN to WAN 2: WAN to LAN -v [value] It means to choose IP version. Value – 4 or 6.
7: Traceroute 8: DNS Query 9: Http Get -a [value] It means set payload data depending to payload type. Value – host name (e.g, www.draytek.com) or hex. stream (e.g., “6162636465666768696a6b6c6d6e6f70”) -f [value] It means to set TCP flag of this packet. Value – SYN ACK PSH FIN RST URG send It means to start a test by sending each packet out. view It means to view the test information and the test result. reset It means to clear all configuration for flowtest.
Syntax Description Parameter Description -c It means to show the latest call log. -f It means to show the IP filter log. -F It means to show the flush log buffer. a: flush all logs c: flush the call log f: flush the IP filter log w: flush the WAN log -h It means to show this usage help. -p It means to show PPP/MP log. -t It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer. -w It means to show WAN log. -x It means to show packet body hex dump. Example > log -w 25:36:25.
Syntax Description Parameter Description INDEX Specify the index number (1 to 8) of the LDAP profile. OPTION -n VALUE Setup Profile Name. -b VALUE Setup Base Distinguished Name. -a VALUE If you have added containers to be published, you may need to specify additional LDAP filters for each class of objects included in these containers. Creating LDAP filters is a fairly complex task that should be performed by advanced users only. LDAP filters must be RFC2254-compliant.
IP Set IP address for LDAP server. port Set port number for LDAP server. dn Set Regular DN value PWD Set Regular password value. Example >ldap set enable 1 >ldap enabled. > ldap set ssl 1 LDAP with SSL has been enabled! > ldap set IP 192.168.100.155 LDAP Server IP has been setting. > ldap set port 389 LDAP Server Port has been setting. > ldap set dn dc=example,dc=com LDAP Regular DN has been setting. > ldap set PWD 123456 LDAP Regular Password has been setting.
> tacacsplus set enable 1 TACACS+ enabled! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > tacacsplus set IP 192.168.1.59 TACACS+ Server IP has been setting. This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > tacacsplus view TACACS+ Enable:Enable. TACACS+ Server IP:192.168.1.
mngt httpport [Http port] Syntax Description Parameter Description Http port It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is 80. Example > mngt httpport 80 % Set web server port to 80 done. Telnet Command: mngt httpsport This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management. Syntax mngt httpsport [Https port] Syntax Description Parameter Description Https port It means to type the number for HTTPS port. The default setting is 443.
Syntax Description Parameter Description ssh port It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is 22. Example > mngt sshport 23 % Set ssh port to 23 done. Telnet Command: mngt noping This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet. Syntax mngt noping [on] mngt noping [off] mngt noping [viewlog] mngt noping [clearlog] Syntax Description Parameter Description on All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet.
on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out. off It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet out. add port It means to add a new TCP port for block. del port It means to delete a TCP port for block. viewlog It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including source MAC and source IP. clearlog It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.
%% FTP server has been enabled.
Telnet Command: mngt lanaccess This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port. Syntax mngt lanaccess -e [0/1] –s [value] –i [value] mngt lanaccess –f mngt lanaccess –d mngt lanaccess –v mngt lanaccess –h Syntax Description Parameter Description -e[0/1] It means to enable/disable the function. 0-disable the function. 1-enable the function. -s[value] It means to specify service offered.
- IP Routed Subnet: disabled Note: the settings do NOT apply to LAN1, LAN1 is always allowed to access the router Telnet Command: mngt echoicmp This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet. Syntax mngt echoicmp [enable] mngt echoicmp [disable] Syntax Description Parameter Description enable It means to accept the echo ICMP packet. disable It means to drop the echo ICMP packet. Example > mngt echoicmp enable %% Echo ICMP packet enabled.
%% Access list : Index IP address Subnet mask ========================================== 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0 Telnet Command: mngt snmp This command allows you to configure SNMP for management. Syntax mngt snmp [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -e <1/2> 1: Enable the SNMP function. 2: Disable the SNMP function.
[ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -e 0/1 Enable / disable the BFP function. 0 – Disable 1 – Enable -s [service] It means to enable different service. service - Available types are FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, TR069, SSH, None and All. -l [failure] It means to set login failure retry times. failure - Available number is from 1 to 255. -p [penalty] It means to set penalty time for BFP.
> msubnet switch 2 On % LAN2 Subnet On! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: msubnet addr This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface. Syntax msubnet addr [2/3/4/5][IP address] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 IP address Type the private IP address for the specified LAN interface. Example > msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.
This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: msubnet status This command is used to display current status of subnet. Syntax msubnet status [2/3/4/5] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 Example > msubnet status 2 % LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60 % DHCP server: Off % Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: msubnet nat This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage. Syntax msubnet nat [2/3/4/5] [On/Off] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 On/Off On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage. Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage.
Telnet Command: msubnet ipcnt This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface. Syntax msubnet ipcnt [2/3/4/5] [IP counts] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 IP counts Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface. The available range is from 0 to 220. Example > msubnet ipcnt 2 15 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
% % % % % % > LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 LAN1 V LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 V V V V Telnet Command: msubnet startip This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP. Syntax msubnet startip [2/3/4/5] [Gateway IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 Gateway IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet. Example > msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.
Example > msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250 % Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > msubnet pppip ? % msubnet pppip <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200; LAN5 192.168.5.200; LAN6 192.168.6.200 Telnet Command: msubnet nodetype This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.
Telnet Command: msubnet primWINS This command is used to configure primary WINS server. Syntax msubnet primWINS [2/3/4/5/6] [WINS IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP. Example > msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!! > msubnet primWINS ? % msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.
% % msubnet secWINS <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 192.168.3.89; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0; LAN6 0.0.0.0 Telnet Command: msubnet tftp This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet. Syntax msubnet tftp [2/3/4/5] [TFTP server name] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 TFTP server name Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.
Example > msubnet mtu ? Usage: >msubnet mtu : LAN1~LAN5,IP_Routed_Subnet,DMZ : 1000 ~ 1496 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes) e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492 Current Settings: LAN1 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN2 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN3 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN4 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN5 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) DMZ MTU: 1500 (Bytes) IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes) Telnet Command: msubnet leasetime This command allows you to set leasetime for DHCP server.
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles. INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile. -v It means to view the information of the specified object profile. Example: object ip obj 1 -v -n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object. NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Telnet Command: object ip grp This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile. Syntax object ip grp setdefault object ip grp INDEX -v object ip grp INDEX -n NAME object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles. INDEX It means the index number of the specified group profile. -v It means to view the information of the specified group profile.
Name :[First] Interface:[Lan] Included ip object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] 804 Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: object ipv6 obj This comman is used to create an IP object profile. Syntax object ip obj setdefault object ip obj INDEX -v object ip obj INDEX -n NAME object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles. INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.
Interface:[Any] Address type:[single] Start ip address:[192.168.1.45] End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0] Invert Selection:[0] Telnet Command: object ipv6 grp This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile. Syntax object ip grp setdefault object ip grp INDEX -v object ip grp INDEX -n NAME object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
[7:][0] [8:][0] [9:][0] [10:][0] [11:][0] Set ok! Telnet Command: object service obj This command is used to create service object profile. Syntax object service obj setdefault object service obj INDEX -v object service obj INDEX -n NAME object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL object service obj INDEX -s CHK [START_P] [END_P] object service obj INDEX -d CHK [START_P] [END_P] Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
profile. -s CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set souce port check and configure port range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP. END_P, type a port number to indicate source port. Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200 -d CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set destination port check and configure port range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP. END_P, type a port number to indicate destination port.
Example >object service grp 1 -n Grope_1 Service Group Profile 1 Name :[Grope_1] Included service object index: [0:][0] [1:][0] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] > object service grp 1 -a 1 2 Service Group Profile 1 Name :[Grope_1] Included service object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] Telnet Command: object kw This command is used to create keyword profile.
-a CONTENTS It means to set the contents for the keyword profile. Example: object kw obj 40 -a test Example > object kw obj 1 -n children Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[] > object kw obj 1 -a gambling Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[gambling] > object kw obj 1 -v Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[gambling] Telnet Command: object fe This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.
".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv", ".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3", ".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox", ".wav", ".wma", ".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm", ".js", ".jse", ".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx", ".olb", ".ole", ".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2", ".bz2", ".cab", ".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas", ".bat", ".com", ".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".
object sms obj INDEX -p Password object sms obj INDEX -q Quota object sms obj INDEX -i Interval object sms obj INDEX -l URL Syntax Description Parameter show setdefault [INDEX] -v -n [NAME] -s [Service Provider] -u [Username] -p [Password] -q [Quota] -I [Interval] -l [URL] Description It means to show the contents for all of the profiles. It means to return to default settings for all profiles. It means the index number (from 1 to 10) of the specified SMS object profile.
Telnet Command: object mail This command is used to create mail object profile.
Password:[******] Sending Interval:[25(seconds)] Telnet Command: object noti This command is used to create notification object profile. Syntax object noti show object noti setdefault object noti obj INDEX -v object noti obj INDEX -n Profile Name object mail obj INDEX –e Category Status object mail obj INDEX –d Category Status Syntax Description Parameter show setdefault [INDEX] Description It means to show the contents for all of the profiles. It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
High Availability [ ]Failover Occurred Config Sync Fail Router Unstable Telnet Command: object schedule This command is used to create schedule object profile. Syntax object schedule set INDEX option object schedule view object schedule setdefault Syntax Description Parameter set [INDEX] Description It means to set the schedule profile. It means the index number (from 1 to 15) of the specified object profile. Available options for schedule includes: -e It means to enable the schedule setup.
> object schedule view 1 Index No.1 -------------------------------------------------[v] Enable Schedule Setup Comment [ Working ] Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2016 ]-[ 11 ]-[ 8 ] Start Time (hh:mm) [ 8 ]:[ 1 ] Duration Time (hh:mm) [ 2 ]:[ 30 ] Action [ Force On ] Idle Timeout [ 0 ] minute(s).(max.
%Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!! Telnet Command: portmaptime This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified protocol. Syntax portmaptime [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -t It means “TCP” protocol. : Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.
1=auto 2=manual(traffic) 3=manual(qos) 4=manual(specific hosts) 0=disable -p Specify a protocol. proto - 1-TCP; 2-UDP; 3-Both. -b 1/0 Enable/disable TWO-way hardware acceleration. -M enable/disable Enable/disable the multicast hardware acceleration. -v Show PPA_WAN_Table and PPA_LAN_Table for reference. -c Clean all settings. ppa n – used in QoS or specific host -l Specify an index number of rule profile for QoS mode. -h Type an IP address for Specific Host mode.
none conn[1] : none conn[2] : none conn[3] : none LPD_data_total=0 usblp_ptr=0 UsbPrintReady=0, UsbIsPrinting=0 Telnet Command: qos setup This command allows user to set general settings for QoS. Syntax qos setup [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -h Type it to display the usage of this command.
Example > qos setup -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1 WAN1 QOS mode is both Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20 WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50 WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS > Telnet Command: qos class This command allows user to set QoS class. Syntax qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][- | ...
directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”. addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.” addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address. Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0 any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command. -p Specify the ID. -s Specify the service type by typing the number.
-l List user defined types. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40. Example > qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330 service name set service type set Port type set to Service Port set > to draytek to 6:TCP Range to 510 ~ 1330 Telnet Command: qos voip This command allows user to enable or disable the QoS for VoIP and RTP. Syntax qos voip [on/off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on/off On – Enable the QoS for VoIP. Off – Disable th QoS for VoIP.
192.168.6.1 [X]Route 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1 Telnet Command: show dmz This command displays current status of DMZ host. Example > show dmz % WAN1 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------1 Disable 172.16.3.221 2 Disable 192.168.1.
9 0 0 0.0.0.0 10 0 0 0.0.0.0 11 0 0 0.0.0.0 12 0 0 0.0.0.0 13 0 0 0.0.0.0 14 0 0 0.0.0.0 15 0 0 0.0.0.0 16 0 0 0.0.0.0 17 0 0 0.0.0.0 18 0 0 0.0.0.0 19 0 0 0.0.0.0 20 0 0 0.0.0.0 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bar': Next Page] Telnet Command: show portmap This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.
Telnet Command: show status This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections. Example > show status System Uptime:71:2:7 LAN Status Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 IP Address:192.168.1.1 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 , 0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 Telnet Command: show clienttraffic This command displays packet information for specified external device.
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
Telnet Command: show statistic This command displays statistics for WAN interface. Syntax show statistic show statistic reset [interface] Syntax Description Parameter Description reset It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero. interface It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 (including multi-PVC) interface for displaying related statistics.
Allow SMB access from LAN only. > Telnet Command: srv dhcp dhcp2 This command is used to enable DCHP2 server. Syntax srv dhcp dhcp2 [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -l It menas to enable the LAN port to public DHCP. 0: Disenable 1: Enable -m It menas to enable MAC address to public DHCP.
server. IP address It means to specify an IP address as the starting point in the IP address pool. cnt It means the IP count number. IP counts It means to specify the number of IP addresses in the pool. The maximum is 10. status It means the execution result of this command. add It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned. del It means removing the selected MAC address. MAC Addr It means to specify MAC Address of the host. all/ALL It means all of the MAC addresses.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns1 This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN. Syntax srv dhcp dns1 [?] srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server. DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1. Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet DNS). Example > srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1 % srv dhcp dns1 % Now: 168.95.1.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp frcdnsmanl This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address. Syntax srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on] srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display the current status. on It means to use manual setting for DNS setting. Off It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp ipcnt This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp ipcnt [?] srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current used IP count number. IP counts It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server. Example > srv dhcp ipcnt ? % srv dhcp ipcnt % Now: 150 Telnet Command: srv dhcp off This function allows users to turn off DHCP server.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp startip Syntax srv dhcp startip [?] srv dhcp startip [IP address] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current used start IP address. IP address It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as the starting point. Example > srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp nodetype This command can set the node type for the DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp nodetype Syntax Description Parameter Description count It means to specify a type for node. 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node Example > srv dhcp nodetype 1 > srv dhcp nodetype ? %% srv dhcp nodetype %% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node % Now: 1 Telnet Command: srv dhcp primWINS This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp secWINS This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp secWINS [WINS IP address] srv dhcp secWINS clear Syntax Description Parameter Description WINS IP address It means the IP address of secondary WINS server. clear It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS server. Example > srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180 > srv dhcp secWINS ? %% srv dhcp secWINS %% srv dhcp secWINS clear % Now: 192.168.1.
Example > srv dhcp tftp TF123 > srv dhcp tftp ? %% srv dhcp tftp % Now: TF123 Telnet Command: srv dhcp tftpdel This command can remove the name defined for the TFTP server. Syntax srv dhcp tftpdel Example > srv dhcp tftp TF123 > srv dhcp tftp ? %% srv dhcp tftp % Now: TF123 > srv dhcp tftpdel % The TFTP Server Name had been deleted !!! Telnet Command: srv dhcp option This command can set the custom option for the DHCP server.
idx number It means the index number of the option value. Example > srv dhcp option -e 1 -c 18 -v /path > srv dhcp option -l % state idx interface opt type % enable 1 ALL LAN 18 ASCII data /path Telnet Command: srv nat dmz This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP Alias first. Syntax srv nat dmz n m [- | … ] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.
Telnet Command: srv nat ipsecpass This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation. Syntax srv nat ipsecpass [options] Syntax Description Parameter Description [options] The available commands with parameters are listed below. on It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation. off It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.
-s It means to specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535. -e It means to specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535. -v It means to display current settings. -r It means to delete the specified open port setting. remove: Type the index number of the profile. -f It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports profiles.
Available index number is from 1 to 10. serv name It means to type one name as service name. proto It means to specify TCP or UDP as the protocol. pub port It means to specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host. pri ip It means to specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service. pri port It means to specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.
Protocol: 0 = Disable, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP Telnet Command: srv nat status This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table. Example > srv nat status NAT Port Redirection Running Table: Index Protocol Public Port Private IP 1 6 80 192.168.1.11 2 0 0 0.0.0.0 3 0 0 0.0.0.0 4 0 0 0.0.0.0 5 0 0 0.0.0.0 6 0 0 0.0.0.0 7 0 0 0.0.0.0 8 0 0 0.0.0.0 9 0 0 0.0.0.0 10 0 0 0.0.0.0 11 0 0 0.0.0.0 12 0 0 0.0.0.0 13 0 0 0.0.0.0 14 0 0 0.0.0.0 15 0 0 0.0.0.0 16 0 0 0.0.0.0 17 0 0 0.0.0.0 18 0 0 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: switch -i This command is used to obtain the TX (transmitted) or RX (received) data for each connected switch. Syntax switch -i [switch idx_no] [option] Syntax Description Parameter Description switch idx_no It means the index number of the switch profile. option The available commands with parameters are listed below. cmd acc traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx] cmd It means to send command to the client. acc It means to set the client authentication account and password.
Example > switch not_respond 1 slave not respond! > Telnet Command: switch on This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices. Example > switch on Enable Extrnal Device auto discovery! Telnet Command: switch off This command is used to turn off the auto discovery for external devices. Example > switch off Disable External Device auto discovery! Telnet Command: switch list This command is used to display the connection status of the switch. Example > switch list? No.
Telnet Command: switch query This command is used to enable or disable the switch query. Example > switch query on Extern Device status query is Enable > switch query off Extern Device status query is Disable Telnet Command: sys admin This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router. Telnet Command: sys adminuser This command is used to create user account and specify LDAP server.
Index:1 User Name:carrie User Password:test123 Telnet Command: sys board This command is used to turn on or turn off the function of physical factory reset button, WLAN button, LEDs, and / or the USB ports on Vigor router.
Usage: sys board led sleepMode [on/off] [time] [minute] Current Setting: LEDs Sleep Mode is off now. Sleep Countdown Time : 1 minute(s) > sys board led sleepMode on LEDs Sleep Mode is on now. > sys board led sleepMode time 3 Sleep Countdown Time set as 3 minute(s). Telnet Command: sys bonjour This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service. Syntax sys bonjour [- | ...
> sys cfg status Profile version: 3.0.
Telnet Command: sys cmdlog This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed. Example > sys cmdlog % Commands Log: (The lowest index is the newest !!!) [1] sys cmdlog [2] sys cmdlog ? [3] sys ? [4] sys cfg status [5] sys cfg ? Telnet Command: sys ftpd This command displays current status of FTP server. Syntax sys ftpd on sys ftpd off Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to turn on the FTP server of the system.
% sys domainname % sys domainname clear % Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intelligent > Telnet Command: sys iface This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address, MAC address and Netmask for the router. Example > sys iface Interface 0 Ethernet: Status: UP IP Address: 192.168.1.1 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00 Interface 4 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: sys name This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for WAN. Syntax sys name [wan1] [ASCII string] sys name [wan1] clear Syntax Description Parameter Description wan1 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it. ASCII string It means the name for router. The maximum character that you can set is 20. Example > > % % % sys name wan1 drayrouter sys name ? sys name
Syntax Description Parameter Description on/off On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot. Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot. hours It means to set the time schedule for router reboot. For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot with an interval of two hours.
Telnet Command: sys qrybuf This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.
Telnet Command: sys britask This command can improve triple play quality. Syntax sys britask [on] sys britask [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to turn on the bridge task for improving the triple play quality. off It means to turn off the bridge task. Example > sys britask on % bridge task is ON, now Telnet Command: sys tr069 This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.
[event code] includes: 0-"0 BOOTSTRAP", 1-"1 BOOT", 2-"2 PERIODIC", 3-"3 SCHEDULED", 4-"4 VALUE CHANGE", 5-"5 KICKED", 6-"6 CONNECTION REQUEST", 7-"7 TRANSFER COMPLETE", 8-"8 DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE", 9-"M Reboot" port [port num] It means to change tr069 listen port number. cert_auth [on/off] on: turn on certificate-based authentication. off: turn off certificate-based authentication. Example > sys tr069 get Int.
Telnet Command: sys sip_alg This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal. Syntax sys sip_alg [1] sys sip_alg [0] Syntax Description Parameter Description 1 It means to turn on SIP ALG. 0 It means to turn off SIP ALG. Example > sys sip_alg ? usage: sys sip_alg [value] 0 - disable SIP ALG 1 - enable SIP ALG current SIP ALG is disabled Telnet Command: sys rtsp_alg This command is used to configure settings (e.g., listen port) for ALG with the protocol of RTSP.
Current listening RTSP Port: 375 > sys rtsp_alg -v Current Open PortMap Number of RTSP ALG: 0 Telnet Command: sys license This command can process the system license. Syntax sys license licmsg sys license licauth sys license regser sys license licera sys license licifno sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry] sys license dev_chg sys license dev_key Syntax Description Parameter Description licmsg It means to display license message. licauth It means the license authentication time setting.
Telnet Command: sys fr_log This command is used for displaying log information related to web syslog. Syntax sys fr_log Example > sys fr_log ? ----------------------------------------------------------------Note: This command shows the same log information with Diagnostics>>Syslog Explo rer. If you don't see any log information, go to the Web Interface and make sure Diagnostics>>Syslog Explorer is enabled. Telnet Command: sys diag_log This command is used for RD debug.
diag_log is Enabled. lineno : 10000. level : 3.
Telnet Command: sys daylightsave This command is used to configure daylight save setting. Syntax sys daylightsave [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [|… ] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -v Display the daylight saving settings. -r Set to factory default setting. -e [1/0] Enable (1) / disable (0) daylight saving.
Telnet Command: sys dnsCacheTbl This command is used to configure TTL settings which will be displayed in DNS Cache table. Syntax sys dnsCacheTbl [|…] Syntax Description Parameter Description [|… ] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -l Display DNS IPv4 entry in the DNS cache table. -s Display DNS IPv6 entry in the DNS cache table.
-e <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) User Access Log. -c <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Call Log. -w <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) WAN Log. -r <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Router/DSL Information. -t <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) AlertLog Setup. -o Define the port number (1 ~ 65535) for AlertLog. Example > sys syslog -a 1 -s 1 -i 192.168.1.25 -d 514 > Telnet Command: sys mailalert This command is used to configure settings for syslog mail alert.
> sys mailalert -e 1 Set Enable Mail Alert. > sys mailalert -v ------ Current setting for Mail Alert -----Mail Alert: Enable SMTP Server IP Address: 0.0.0.0 SMTP Server Port: 25 Alert Mail Reciver E-maiil Address: Mail Return E-mail Address: Use SSL: Disable SMTP Authentication: Disable Username for SMTP Authentication: Password for SMTP Authentication: Mail Alert for DoS Attack: Enable. Mail Alert for APPE: Enable. Mail Alert for VPN Log: Enable. Mail Alert for APPE Signature: Disable.
22 - GMT-01:00 Azores, Cape Verde Is.
Telnet Command: sys eap_tls This command is used to disable or enable EAP-TLS. You might have to enable EAP-TLS compatibility to avoid compatibility issues with some operating systems. But, please note that enabling EAP-TLS compatibility will lower down the connection security level.
Example > sys dashboard -0 1 Front Panel enabled > sys dashboard show Front Panel enabled System Information enabled IPv4 LAN Information enabled IPv4 Internet Access enabled IPv6 Internet Access enabled Interface enabled Security enabled System Resource enabled LTE Status enabled Quick Access enabled VoIP enabled Telnet Command: testmail This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail. Example > testmail Send out test mail Mail Alert:[Disable] SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.
((0)) InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<< InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<< PortMapProtocol >>TCP<< The tmpvirtual server index >>0<< PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<< Ftp Example [MICROSOFT] ((1)) InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.
Telnet Command: upnp subscribe This command can show all UPnP services subscribed. Example > upnp on UPNP start. > upnp subscribe Vigor> upnp subscribe >>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1 ----- Subscribtion1 ------sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1 expireTime =6926 active =1 DeliveryURLs =
real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<< real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<< hit_portmap_index >>0<< The protocol >>0<< time >>0<< --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] --- Telnet Command: upnp wan This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP. Syntax upnp wan [n] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP. n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface. n=1, WAN1 n=2, WAN2 ……….
Vodafone ZTE ZTE ZTE ZTE Vodafone K4605 ZTE MF626 ZTE MF627 plus ZTE MF633 ZTE MF636 3.5G 3.5G 3.5G 3.5G 3.5G Y Y Y Y Y SpinCom SpinCom GPRS Modem 3.5G Y - MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] - Telnet Command: usb user This command is used to set profiles for FTP/SMB users.
Telnet Command: vigbrg set This command is to configure specified WAN as bridge mode. Syntax Description vigbrg set -v [IP version] -w [WAN_idx] -l [LAN_idx] -e [0/1] -f [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description -v [IP version] Indicate the IP version for the IP address. 4 – IPv4. 6 – IPv6. -w [WAN_idx] WAN_idx – Indicate the WAN interface. 1 – WAN1 2 – WAN2 3 – WAN3 4 – WAN4 -l [LAN_idx] LAN_idx – Indicate the LAN interface.
Telnet Command: vigbrg cfgip This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the router through the IP address configured here. Syntax vigbrg cfgip [IP Address] Syntax Description Parameter Description IP Address It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router. Example > > % % vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15 vigbrg cfgip ? Vigor Bridge Config IP, Now: 192.168.1.
Parameter Description id It means the group 0 to 7 for VLAN. set It indicates each port can join more than one VLAN group. set_ex It indicates each port can join one VLAN group at one time. p1/p2/p3/p4 It indicates LAN port 1 to LAN port 4. To group LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and/or LAN4 under one VLAN group, please type the port number(s) you want. s1/s2/s3/s4 It is only available for WALN models.
pri_no It means the priority of VLAN profile. pri_no=0 ~7 (from none to highest priority). Example > vlan pri 1 2 VLAN1: Priority=2 Telnet Command: vlan restart This command can make VLAN settings restarted with newest configuration. Syntax vlan restart Example > vlan restart ? VLAN restarts!!! Telnet Command: vlan status This command display current status for VLAN.
Parameter Description [1/2/3/4/5/6] It means interfaces, LAN1 ~ LAN4. Example > vlan subnet group_id 2 % Vlan Group-0 using LAN2 ! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: vlan submode This command changes the VLAN encapsulation mechanisms in the LAN driver. Syntax vlan submode [on|off|status] Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to enable the promiscuous mode. off It means to enable the normal mode.
[p1_untag] [on/off] P1_untag on: It allows the incoming of untagged packets form LAN port 1. P1_untag off: It does not allow the incoming of untagged packets from LAN port 1. Example > vlan tagged unlimited on unlimited mode is ON Telnet Command: vlan vid This command is used to configure VID number for each VLAN channel. Syntax vlan vid n vid_no Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means VLAN channel. The ranage is from 0 to 7. vid_no It means the value of VLAN ID.
Telnet Command: voip debug This command can display debug message on the screen. Syntax voip debug [flush] voip debug [showmsg] Syntax Description Parameter Description flush It means to clear current log. showmsg It means to show current log. Example > voip debug showmsg -->Send Message to 192.168.1.2:5060 <02:35:16> INVITE sip:192.168.1.2 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 192.168.1.1:5060;branch=z9hG4bK-YMa-3630;rport From: ;tag=WLJ-11782 To:
0 – Disable 1 - Enable -p Determines the block path. 1:in_url, 2:in_number 3:out_url, 4:out_number 5:(in & out)_url, 6:(in & out)_number) ) -n Determines the block number (maximum 29 characters). -d Block the specified domain. -i Block the specified interface(s) or All interfaces. -s Specify schedule profiles by indicating the index number of the schedule profile. Four schedule profiles can be used at one time. -w Delete the selected entry.
-C Hotkey to enable call forwarding (no answer) function. -c Hotkey to disable call forwarding function. -W Hotkey to enable call waiting function. -w Hotkey to disable call waiting function. -H Hotkey to enable hide caller ID function. -h Hotkey to disable hide caller ID function. -D Hotkey to enable DND function. -d Hotkey to disable DND function. -A Hotkey to enable block anonymous calls function.
Telnet Command: voip dsp Syntax voip dsp countrytone [channel] [value] voip dsp dialtonepwr [channel] [AbsoluteValue] voip dsp EchoCanceller [type] [w_size] [nlp] voip dsp cidtype [channel] [value] voip dsp micgain [channel] [value/(1~10)] voip dsp spkgain [channel] [value/(1~10)] voip dsp jitterBuffer [port] [mode] [value] voip dsp dtmfDetset [nLevel] [nTwist] voip dsp dtmftonepwr [Level] voip dsp cwtonepwr [ch] [value] voip dsp pstnringfxs [1|2] [on|off] voip dsp relaydbounce [on|off] voip dsp setRingPat
w_size The Line Echo Canceller (LEC) window size is 4, 6, 8 or 16 (ms). nlp Nlp - Non-linear processing (NLP) for more smooth transitions. 1 - disable 0 - enable voip dsp cidtype channel Set the caller ID type for FXS 1 (Channel 1) or FXS 2 (Channel 2). 1 – FXS 1 2 – FXS 2 value Each number (1 to 6) represents different type.
clrev - clear phone hook status. getev - get phone hook status. clrfskcid - clear fsk data for caller-ID from PSTN line. getfskcid - get fsk data for caller-ID from PSTN line. clrdtmfcid - clear dtmf data for caller-ID from PSTN line. getdtmfcid - get dtmf data for caller-ID from PSTN line. voicebuf - get message for available voice buffer pool. clrint - clear status for interrupt. getint - get status for interrupt.
ch Set the FAX error correction mode. ch : range (0 ~ 1) mode mode : EC(error correction) ch(x) mode(0) : REDUNDANCY EC(error correction) ch(x) mode(1) : FEC voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –l / voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –h [value] voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –r 0 value “setDtmfCidLevel” is used to configure the signal strength for transferring to FXS DTMF caller ID.
0 – disable the substitution. channel – 0 (FXS 1) -1 (FXS 2) value – 0 – 9 voip dsp setRingThres port Set the threshold for ring signal. Port setting is “0” only. value Available settings 0-250. Unit is ms. The time is an approximate value. voip dsp setCidDetGain tx|rx gain Set the gain value of caller ID detected. Tx gain – Available settings -24 ~ 12. Default is 0. Rx gain – Available settings -24 ~ 12. Default is -6. Example > voip dsp countrytone ? VoIP has been disable. Please enable VoIP first.
voip rtp symmetric [value] voip rtp tos ? Syntax Description Parameter Description voip rtp codec [sip acc index][type|size|vad|one][v alue] Set the voice coding. sip acc index –SIP account index number. Available number, 1 ~ 12. type – Available settings include 0. G.711MU 1. G.711A 2. G.729A/B 3. G.723 4. G.
Example > voip rtp codec 1 type 3 > voip rtp dtmf 2 mode 3 > voip rtp port start 10070 end 14400 Set start port: 10070 > voip rtp port end 14400 Set end port: 14400 > voip rtp symmetric 1 Set symmetric rtp to Enable Telnet Command: voip sip This command allows users to set SIP account. Syntax voip sip acc n [- | ... ] voip sip calllog voip sip ep n [- | ... ] voip sip misc[- | ... ] voip sip nat [- | ...
0 – disable 1 - enable -N [name] Set SIP account display name. Name - max. 23 characters. -n [number] Set SIP account number. Number - max. 63 characters. -a [id] Set SIP authentication ID. Id - max. 63 characters. -A [enable] Enable /disable to use SIP authentication ID. 0 – disable 1 - enable -p [passwd] Set SIP account password (max. 63 characters). -e [sec] Set expiry time (default 3600) for SIP account. -w [enable] Enable to make phone call without registering.
-l [enable] Enable / disable the function of hot line. 0 – disable 1 - enable -W [enable] Enable / disable the function of warm line. 0 – disable 1 - enable -w [enable] Enable / disable the function of call waiting enable. 0 – disable 1 - enable -E [enable] Enable / disable the function of call waiting enable but only remind one time. 0 – disable 1 - enable -x Enable / disable the function of call transfer.
1 - enable -h [enable] Enable/disable call hold mode based on protocol RFC2543 (0: disable, 1:enable). -i [enable] Enable CODEC change without Re-INVITE. 0 - disable 1 - enable -p [enable] Enable PRACK message. 0 – Not support PRACK. 1 – Support PRACK. -P [enable] Enable IP Call. 0 – Disable IP call. 1 – Enable IP call. -H [enable] SIP INFO packet will be sent out when encounting hook flash event. 0 - disable 1 - enable -t [val] Set the mode of User-Agent (e.g.
reg mode : 1 | reg. [No] alias_ip_idx : 0 backup list : domain : 172.16.3.133 proxy : | outbound [No] | DNS-SRV [No] noreg call : No disp. Name : acc number : --auth. ID : | [disable] expiry : 3600 NAT mode : 0 ring ports : 0 ring pat. : 1 call fwd mode : 0 call fwd url : call fwd timer : 30 Broadsoft : disable Italian ITSP modification: disable Telnet Command: voip secure This command allows users to enable or disable secure phone feature, and SAS voice prompt.
vpn l2lset [list index] localid [localid] vpn l2lset [list index]main [auto/proposal index] vpn l2lset [list index] aggressive [g1/g2] vpn l2lset [list index]pfs [on/off] vpn l2lset [list index] phase1[lifetime] vpn l2lset [list index] phase2[lifetime] Syntax Description Parameter Description list index It means the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile. peerid It means the peer identity for aggressive mode. localid It means the local identity for aggressive mode.
off – Disable. pin_secret It means to set PIN code with secret. - Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234). - Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g.
Parameter Description It means the index number of the VPN profile. <1/2/3/4/5/6> 1 2 3 4 5 6 – – – – – – it it it it it it means means means means means means LAN1 LAN2. LAN3 LAN4. LAN5. LAN6. Example > vpn subnet 1 2 > Telnet Command: vpn setup This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.
vpn setup 1 name1 ipsec_out 1.2.3.4 1234 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 For L2TP Dial-Out It means the index number of the profile. It means the name of the profile. It means the IP address to dial to. It means the user and the password required for the L2TP connection. It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g.,, vpn setup 1 name1 l2tp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 For Dial-In It means the index number of the profile.
Parameter Description It means the index number of the profile. Available index numbers: 1 ~ 32 For Common Settings It means the index number of the profile. pname It means the name of the profile. ena It means to enable or disable the profile. on – Enable off - Disable thr It means the way that VPN connection passes through. Available settings are wlf, wlo, w2f, and w2o. w1f – WAN1 First. w1o – WAN1 Only. w2f – WAN2 First. w2o – WAN2 Only.
“opwd=1234” means to set Password = 1234. pauth It means PPP Authentication. “pauth=pc” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP&CHAP. “pauth=p” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP Only ovj It means VJ Compression. “ovj=on/off” means to enable/disable VJ Compression. okey It means IKE Pre-Shared Key. “okey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd. ometh It means IPSec Security Method. “ometh=ah/” means AH. “ometh=espd/espda/” means ESP DES without/with Authentication.
mywip It means My WAN IP. “mywip=1.2.3.4” means to set My WAN IP as “1.2.3.4”. rgip It means Remote Gateway IP. “rgip=1.2.3.4” means to set Remote Gateway IP as “1.2.3.4”. rnip It means Remote Network IP. “rnip=1.2.3.0” means to set Remote Network IP as “1.2.3.0”. rnmask It means Remote Network Mask. “rnmask=255.255.255.0” means to set Remote Network Mask as “255.255.255.0”. rip It means RIP Direction. “rip=d” means to set RIP Direction as “Disable”. “rip=t” means to set RIP Direction as “TX”.
Example > vpn mroute 1 add 192.168.5.0/24 % 192.168.5.0/24 % Add new route 192.168.5.0/24 to profile 1 Telnet Command: vpn list This command allows users to view LAN to LAN VPN profiles. Syntax vpn list all vpn list com vpn listout vpn list in vpn listnet Syntax Description Parameter Description all It means to list configuration of the specified profile. com It means to list common settings of the specified profile.
% Provide ISDN Number % IKE phase 1 mode % IKE Local ID : off : Main mode : % Dial-In Settings --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] --- > vpn list 1 com % Common Settings % % % % % % > Profile Name : Profile Status : Netbios Naming Packet : Call Direction : Idle Timeout : PING to keep alive : ??? Disable Pass Both 300 off Telnet Command: vpn remote This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service.
Example > vpn 2ndsubnet on %Enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP! Telnet Command: vpn trunk This command allows users to configure VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding tunnel policy.
profiles will be activated alternatively. Recover – Indicate the duration of VPN backup operation. Resume – When VPN connection breaks down or disconnects, Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN connection. Second – “0” means to dial each six seconds automatically. “60 ~ 2147483647” means to early handle for less than 30 seconds within designated time. lb It means to create VPN trunk with load balance.
0 – any 1 – ICMP 2 – IGMP 6 – TCP 17 – UDP 255 – TCP/UDP Frag – “ON” means to bind the fragmented packet; “OFF” means not to care. It is the default setting. bind insert It is used to insert additional load balance policy into an existing policy. After_BindIndex – Specify an index number that new additional policy should be inserted before. See the following example: vpn trunk bind insert 1 y vpnlb 2 192.168.
% % % > % Dial to : 1.2.3.4 Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0 Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0 vpn setup 2 market pptp_out 5.6.7.8 vigor 5678 192.168.1.31 255.255.255.0 Profile Change Log ... % Profile Index : 2 % Profile Name : market % Username : vigor % Password : 5678 % Call Direction : Dial-Out % Type of Server : PPTP % Dial to : 5.6.7.8 % Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.31 % Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.
sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, set it block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel. Example > vpn NetBios set H2l 1 Pass % Remote Dial In Profile Index [1] : % NetBios Block/Pass: [PASS] Telnet Command: vpn mss This command allows users to configure the maximum segment size (MSS) for different TCP types.
Telnet Command: vpn ike This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list. Syntax vpn ike -q Example > vpn ike -q IKE Memory Status and Leakage List # # # # of of of of free free free free L-Buffer=95, minimum=94, leak=1 M-Buffer=529, minimum=529 leak=3 S-Buffer=1199, minimum=1198, leak=1 Msgid-Buffer=1024, minimum=1024 Telnet Command: vpn Multicast This command allows users to pass or block the multi-cast packet via VPN.
off – the packets cannot pass through NAT. Example > vpn pass2nd on % 2nd subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel! Telnet Command: vpn pass2nat This command allows users to determine if the packets passing through by NAT or not when the VPN tunnel disconnects. Syntax vpn pass2nat [on] vpn pass2nat [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT. off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.
3 – LAN3 … -I [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx] Set the virtual subnet (e.g., 172.16.3.250). -v Display current status of virtual subnet. Example > vpn sameS -i 1 -e 1 -E 1 -e 1 -I 10.10.10.0 -o add > vpn sameS -v IPsec with the same subnet: VPN profile 1 enable, % translated LAN1 to Virtual subnet: 10.10.10.0 Telnet Command: wan ppp_mru This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific network.
value It means the number of MTU for PPP. The available range is from 1000 to 1500. For Static IP/DHCP, the maximum number will be 1500. For PPPoE, the maximum number will be 1492. For PPTP/L2TP, the maximum number will be 1460. Example > wan mtu 1100 > wan mtu ? Static IP/DHCP (Max MSS: 1500) PPPoE(Max MSS: 1492) PPTP/L2TP(Max MSS: 1460) % wan ppp_mss % Now: 1100 Telnet Command: wan dns This command allows users to configure primary and / or secondary DNS server.
> wan DF_check on %DF bit check enable! > wan DF_check off %DF bit check disable (reset DF bit)! Telnet Command: wan disable This command allows you to disable WAN connection. Example > wan disable WAN %WAN disabled. Telnet Command: wan enable This command allows you to disable wan connection. Example > wan enable WAN %WAN1 enabled. Telnet Command: wan forward This command allows you to enable or disable the function of WAN forwarding. The packets are allowed to be transmitted between different WANs.
PVC_WAN3: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 PVC_WAN4: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 PVC_WAN5: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 Telnet Command: wan modem / wan modem2 This command, wan modem, allows you to configure 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) of WAN
wakeup [on/off] It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice. vid Set VID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router specifies WAN interface by USB port. pid Set PID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router specifies WAN interface by USB port. status Display current status of USB modem.
wan lte send [number][message] wan lte stus wan lte tag [index #/all] wan lte user [string] wan lte wms [send[cdma/gwpp]/recv[cdma/gwgw]/setting] Syntax Description Parameter Description auth [0/1] Set PPP authentication of LTE WAN. 0: None. 1: PAP or CHAP. band Display working band information for LTE network connection. del [index #/all] Delete an SMS from the LTE SIM card by specifying the index number. Use “all” to delete all. pass Set the password of LTE WAN.
[...] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -a <0/1>: Enable or disable Access Control List. (0: disable 1: enable) -c <0/1>: Set whether to reply with MAC address. (0: no 1: yes) -e <0/1>: Enable or disable Reboot on SMS Message function. (0: disable 1: enable) -f <0/1>: Set whether to reply with WAN1 IP address. (0: no 1: yes) -g <0/1>: Set whether to reply with WAN2 IP address. (0: no 1: yes) -h <0/1>: Set whether to reply with LTE WAN IP address.
SMS service status : Ready Number of SMS sent : 0 Telnet Command: wan detect This command allows you to configure WAN connection detection. When Ping Detection is enabled (for Static IP or DHCP or PPPoE mode), Router pings specified IP addresses to detect the WAN connection.
WAN4: off WAN5: off > wan detect wan1 target 192.168.1.78 Set OK > wan detect wan1 on Set OK > wan detect status WAN1: on, Target=192.168.1.78, TTL=255 WAN2: off WAN3: off WAN4: off WAN5: off > Telnet Command: wan lb This command allows you to Enable/Disable for each WAN to join auto load balance member. Syntax wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] on wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] off wan lb status Syntax Description Parameter Description wan1/wan2 Specify which WAN will be applied with load balance.
Telnet Command: wan mvlan This command allows you to configure multi-VLAN for WAN and LAN. It supports pure bridge mode (modem mode) between Ethernet WAN and LAN port 2~4. Syntax wan mvlan [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service type/vlan priority] [px ... ] wan mvlan keeptag[pvc_no][on/off] Syntax Description Parameter Description pvc_no It means index number of PVC. There are 10 PVC, 0(Channel-1) to 9(Channel-9) allowed to be configured.
Parameter Description channel # There are 4 (?) channels including VLAN and PVC. Available settings are: 1=Channel 1 3=Channel 3 4=Channel 4 5=Channel 5 WAN interface # Type a number to indicate the WAN interface. 1=WAN1 2=WAN2 status It means to display current bridge status.
Telnet Command: wan phyvlan This command is used to set VLAN tag insertion for outer tag (service) for WAN interface. WAN interfaces must be configured first before setting VLAN encapsulation. Syntax wan phyvlan wan [#] tag [value] wan phyvlan wan [#] pri [value] wan phyvlan wan [#] [enable|disable] wan phyvlan stat Syntax Description Parameter Description [#] It means WAN interface. 1 – WAN1 2 – WAN2 tag [value] It means to tag a value onto the selected WAN interface.
wan[#] Specify the WAN interface. rdate Specify the WAN budget refresh time. day – Available settings are from 1 to 30. hour – Available settings are from 1 to 23. E.g.
-c [count] Set the maximum times of ping failure during a Discovery. count: Available settings are 1 ~ 10. Default value is 3. Example > wan detect_mtu -w 2 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10 detecting mtu size:1500!!! mtu size:1470!!! Telnet Command: wan detect_mtu6 This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
0 – Disable 1 - Enable Field 4 – Specify main WAN by typing 1 to 4. The main WAN will be set to always on. Field 5 – Specify traffic threshold [Download threshold(Kbps)]. Field 6 - Specify traffic threshold [Upload threshold (Kbps)]. For example, WAN 2 will be set as failover, and will be active when any of selected WANs has reached traffic threshold. WAN 4 is the selected WAN. Download threshold : 50 Kbpsl; Upload threshold : 20 Kbps.
-h Enable HTTPS redirection. 0: disable. 1: enable. Enable portal detection. 0: disable. 1: enable. Configure APP id. For example, to configure facebook APP id, you can type: >hsportal -p 1 -f -i this_is_app_id Profile 1 set facebook login disabled ... [OK] Configure app key. For example, to configure google APP key, you can type: > hsportal -p 1 -g -i this_is_app_key Profile 1 set google login disabled ... [OK] Configure landing page mode. 0: fixed URL. 1: user request. 2: bulletin. E.g.
0 - disable 1 – enable -a [0/1] Enable auto backup and start a new record for user information. 0 - disable 1 – enable -m [1~10] Set email notigication object. [1~10]- Index number of object profile. -s [1~10] Set SMS notigication object. [1~10]- Index number of object profile. Example > hsportal info -e 1 Enabled database to record information ... [OK] > hsportal info -a 1 Enabled auto backup and start a new record for user information ...
wl acl clean It means to clean all access control setting.
…. number=13, means Channel 13. preamble [enable] It means to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. 0: disable to use long preamble. 1: enable to use long preamble. txburst [enable] It means to enhance the performance in data transmission about 40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst).
Current mode is 11bgn % Please restart wireless after you set the channel > wl config channel 13 Current channel is 13 % Please restart wireless after you set the channel. > wl config preamble 1 Long preamble is enabled % Please restart wireless after you set the parameters. > wl config ssid 1 enable dray SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray % Please restart wireless after you set the parameters.
Telnet Command: wl act This command allows users to activate wireless settings. Syntax wl act [En] Syntax Description Parameter Description En It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation. 0: diable 1: enable Example > wl act on % Set Wlan to Enable. Telnet Command: wl scan This command allows users to perform AP scanning.
2 - display gray/unknown list, 3 - display all list Example > wl scan set wlist 001122aabbcc > wl scan start > wl scan show 3 > Telnet Command: wl stamgt This command is used to configure connection time and reconnection time for each SSID that wireless client used for accessing into Internet. Syntax wl stamgt [enable/disable] [ssid_num]. wl stamgt [show] [ssid_num]. wl stamgt set [ssid_num] [c] [r] wl stamgt reset [ssid_num].
1: 2: 3: 4: En SSID1 SSID2 SSID3 SSID4 It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation. 0: disable 1: enable Example > wl iso_vpn 1 on % ssid: 1 isolate vpn on :1 Telnet Command: wl wpa This command allows you to configure WPA wireless settings. Syntax wl wpa 1/2/3 Syntax Description Parameter Description wl wpa Type 1/2/3 to represent different WPA modes.
enable It means to enable the WMM for each SSID. 0: disable 1: enable Apsd [value] It means to enable / disable the ASPD(automatic power-save delivery) function. 0: disable 1: enable show It displays current status of WMM. QueIdx It means the number of the queue which the WMM settings will be applied to. There are four queues, best effort, background, voice, and video. Aifsn It controls how long the client waits for each data transmission.
Telnet Command: wl ht This command allows you to configure wireless settings. Syntax wl ht bw value wl ht gi value wl ht badecline value wl ht autoba value wl ht rdg value wl ht msdu value wl ht txpower value wl ht antenna value wl ht greenfield value Syntax Description Parameter Description wl ht bw value The value you can type is 0 (for BW_20) and 1 (for BW_40).
Telnet Command: wl restart This command allows you to restart wireless setting. Example > wl restart Wireless restart................ Telnet Command: wl wds This command allows you to configure WDS settings. Syntax wl wds mode [value] wl wds security [value] wl wds ap [value] wl wds hello [value] wl wds status wl wds show wl wds mac [value] wl wds flush Syntax Description Parameter Description mode [value] It means to specify connection mode for WDS.
0 – disable the function. status It means to display WDS link status for 2.4GHz connection. show It means to display current WDS settings. mac add [index addr] add [index addr] – Add the peer MAC entry in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table. mac clear/disable/enable [index/all] clear/disable/enable [index/all]- Clear, disable, enable the specifed or all MAC entries in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table. e.g, wl dual wds mac enable 1 flush It means to reset all WDS setting.
string and specify the index number of the profile to be applied. WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII string or 10/26 Hexadecimal digit format. ssid [ssid_name] Specify the SSID for wireless 2.4GHz AP client. bssid Type the MAC address for wireless 2.4GHz AP client.
Telnet Command: wl set8021x This command allows you to configure the external or internal server used by Vigor router for wireless authentication. Syntax wl set8021x –t [0/1] wl set8021x –v Syntax Description Parameter Description -t Specify the type (external or internal) of wireless authentication server. 0 – Indicate the external RADIUS server. 1- Indicate the local 802.1x server. -v View the settings of 802.1x.
> wl bndstrg chk_time 50 30 argv[0]:chk_time, argv[1]:50, argv[2]:30 %% Wireless card must be reset for configurations to take effect %% (Telnet Command: wl restart) Telnet Command: wl artfns This command allows users to configure airtime fairness function for wireless (2.4GHz) connection. Syntax wl artfns enable [value] wl artfns trg_num [value] wl artfns show Syntax Description Parameter Description enable [value] It means to enable wireless airtime fairness function.
rs_low – Set a value of Strictly Minimum RSSI (62~86). rs_low_security – Set a value of Minimum RSSI (62~86). delta – Set a value of Adjacent AP RSSI (1~20). restart Restart to activate roaming function. show Dispaly current configuration of roaming function. Example > % % % % > wl drayrs show Mode : Disable rs_low : -73 rs_low_secure : -66 delta : 5 Telnet Command: wl_dual acl This command allows the user to configure wireless (5GHz) access control settings.
show It means to display current status of access control. showmode It means to show the mode for each SSID. clear It means to clear all of the access control settings.
Telnet Command: wl_dual cardmac Example > wl_dual cardmac Card MAC: 54:2a:a2:37:00:ef Telnet Command: wl_dual config This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless connection (5GHz).
preamble [enable] It means to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. 0: disable to use long preamble. 1: enable to use long preamble. preamble show It means to display if preamble is enabled or not.
> wl_dual config preamble 1 Long preamble is enabled % Please restart 5G wireless after you set the parameters. > wl_dual config ssid 1 enable dray SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray % Please restart 5G wireless after you set the parameters. > wl_dual config ssid show SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray 2 0 0 DrayTek_5G_Guest 3 0 0 4 0 0 Telnet Command: wl_dual restart This command allows you to restart wireless setting (5GHz). Example > wl_dual restart 5G wireless restart..............
Example > wl_dual security 1 wpa2psk 123456789e % Please restart 5G wireless after you set the parameters. > wl_dual security show %% 5G Wireless LAN Security Settings: % SSID1 %% Mode: WPA2/PSK % SSID2 %% Mode: Disable % SSID3 %% Mode: Disable % SSID4 %% Mode: Disable Telnet Command: wl_dual stalist This command is used to display the wireless station which accessing Internet via Vigor router.
wl_dual wds show wl_dual wds mac add [index addr] wl_dual wds mac clear/disable/enable [index/all] wl_dual wds flush Syntax Description Parameter Description mode [value] It means to specify connection mode for WDS. [value]: Available settings are : d: Disable b: Bridge r: Repeapter security [value] It means to configure security mode with encrypted keys for WDS. mode: Available settings are: disable: No security.
> wl dual wds mode b > wl dual wds security wep > > > wl_dual wds show 5G Wireless WDS Setting Mode : Bridge Security : WEP AP Function : Enable Send Hello Function : Enable Bridge Index 1 2 3 4 : Enable MAC Address 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 Repeater : Index Enable MAC Address 5 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 6 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 7 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 8 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 > wl_dual wds wep 12345 % Please restart router after you set the parameters.
> wl_dual wps enable 1 WPS is enabled. > wl_dual wps pin 88563337 WPS has triggered by PIN code. The AP will wait for WPS request from your client for 2 minutes... Telnet Command: wl_dual set8021x This command allows you to configure the external or internal server used by Vigor router for wireless authentication (5GHz). Syntax wl_dual set8021x –t [0/1] wWl_dual set8021x –v Syntax Description Parameter Description -t Specify the type (external or internal) of wireless authentication server.
Disable – disable the security settings. wpapsk [key] – WPA Pre-shared Key will be used. Keys must start with 0x to be identified as a Hexadecimal number key. WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format. wpa2psk [key] – WPA2 Pre-shared Key will be used. Keys must start with 0x to be identified as a Hexadecimal number key. WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format. wpamixpsk [key] – WPA Mixed Pre-shared Key will be used.
show Display current status (enable or disable) and triggering client number for airtime fairness function. status Display whether the function of airtime fairness is enabled or disabled.
> % % % % wl_dual drayrs show Mode : Strictly Minimun RSSI rs_low : -68 rs_low_secure : -66 delta : 2 Telnet Command: radius This command allows you to configure detailed settings for RADIUS server Syntax radius enable [0/1] radius authport [port number] radius set_auth_method [method idx] radius client [add] [idx] -i [address] -m [mask] -p [prefix] -l [length] -s [secret] radius client [del] [idx] radius show radius set_dot1x_phase1 -e [method_idx] radius set_dot1x_phase1 -d [method_idx] radius set_dot1
[method_idx] method_idx - Specify which method will be used. Dot1x_phase2 can only support MS-CHAPv2 now. So only “1” can be used for it. -e Set method for dot1x_phase1 or dot1x_phase2. -d Delete method for dot1x_phase1 or dot1x_phase2. Example > radius client add 1 -i 192.168.1.1 -m 255.255.255.0 -s 123 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: local_8021x The command is used to configure general settings for Local 802.
Telnet Command: wol This command allows Administrator to set the white list of WAN IP addresses/Subnets, that the magic packet from these IP addresses/Subnets will be eligible to pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client. You also need to set NAT rule for LAN client. Syntax wol up [MAC Address]/[IP Address] wol fromWan [on/off/any] wol fromWan_Setting [idx][ip address][mask] Syntax Description Parameter Description MAC Address It means the MAC address of the host.
Telnet Command: user The command is used to create new user account profiles. Syntax sser set [-e|-d|-c|-l|-o|-a|-r|-b] user edit [PROFILE_IDX] [-e|-d|-n|-p|-t|-u|-i|-q|-r|-w|-s|-m|-x|-v] user account [USER_NAME] [-t|-d|-q|-r|-w] Syntax Description Parameter Description set It means to configure general setup for the user management. edit It means to modify the selected user profile. account It means to set time and data quota for specified user account.
PROFILE_IDX Type the index number of the profile that you want to edit. -e Enable User profile function. -d Disable User profile function. -n It means to set a user name for a profile. e.g.,-n fortest -p It means to configure user password. e.g., -p 60fortest -t It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user profile 0:Disable 1:Enable -u It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user profile 0:Disable 1:Enable -i It means to set idle time. e.g.
Example > user account admin -d 1 Enable the [admin] data quota limited Telnet Command: appqos The command is used to configure QoS for APP. Syntax appqos view appqos enable [0/1] appqos traceable [-v | -e AP_INDEX CLASS | -d AP_INDEX] appqos untraceable [-v | -e AP_INDEX CLASS | -d AP_INDEX] Syntax Description Parameter Description view It means to display current status of APP QoS. enable[0/1] It means to enable or disable the function of APP QoS.
Telnet Command: nand bad /nand usage “NAND usage” is used to display NAND Flash usage; “nand bad” is used to display NAND Flash bad blocks.
Example > apm clear ? Clear all clients ... done Telnet Command: apm profile This command allows to configure wireless profiles to be used in Central AP Management. Syntax apm profile clone [from index][to index][[new name] apm profile del [index] apm profile reset apm profile summary apm profile [show [profile index]] apm profile apply [profile index] [client index1 [index2 ..
3 4 - - - - - Telnet Command: apm cache This command is used to display or remove the information of registered VigorAP, including MAC address, name, and authentication. Up to 30 entries of registered information can be stored and displayed. Syntax apm cache [show] apm cache clear Syntax Description Parameter Description show It means to display the information related to VigorAP registered Vigor2926. clear It means to remove the information related to VigorAP registered Vigor2926.
[4] – The forth number means the limit num of station. Available range is 3~64. [5] – The fifth number means the upload limit function. Type 1 – enable upload limit, 0 – disable upload limit. [6] – The sixth number means the download limit function. Type 1 – enable download limit, 0 – disable download limit. [7] – The seventh number means disassociation by idle time. Type 1 – enable disassociation, 0 – disable disassociation.
10.Traffic limit unit (download) : 1 flag : 49 Telnet Command: apm apdetect This command is used to enable/disable AP detection function. Syntax apm apdetect [get] apm apdetect [set] [enable/disable AP Detection 1/0][Refresh Time]. Syntax Description Parameter Description get It is used to get AP detection data from VigorAP (e.g., AP900). set It allows to set detect configuration to VigorAP. enable/disable AP Detection 1/0 It is used to enable or disable the AP detection function.
8d 03:16:10 syslog: [APM] Send Rogue AP Detection data. 8d 03:16:41 kernel: 60:fa:cd:55:f5:ea had associated successfully 8d 03:16:55 kernel: 60:fa:cd:55:f5:ea had disassociated. Telnet Command: apm syslog This command is used to display related syslog data from central AP management.
960 [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several parameters in one line. -e <1/0> 1: Enable the function of High Availability (HA). 0: Disable the function of High Availability (HA). -l <1/0> 1: Enable the function of recording the operation record of HA in Syslog. 0: Disable the function of recording the operation record of HA in Syslog. -M <1/0> Specify the Redundancy Method for HA.
Example > > ha set -h -4 LAN1 192.168.1.1 % Enable IPv4 Virtual IP on LAN1 % Virtual IP can not be same as router IP (192.168.1.1)!!! > Telnet Command: ha show This command can be used to show the settings information about config sync and general setup. Syntax ha show –c ha show –g Syntax Description Parameter Description -c Show the settings of config sync. -g Show the settings of general setup.
-a Show the status for all of the routers in HA group. -m Show the status of local router only. Detail Level 0: Important status. 1: Important status, plus some information. 2: Show settings Example > ha status -m 2 % [Local Router] DrayTek % IP : 192.168.1.
Telnet Command: swm get This command is used to get configuration information of VigorSwitch which connecting to Vigor router in LAN. Before using such command, make sure VigorSwitch has been managed under Vigor router (refer to Telnet Command: swm profile for adding a VigorSwitch device onto Vigor router). Syntax swm get [MAC] Syntax Description Parameter Description MAC Specify the MAC address of the switch.
Index range: (1 - 30) Example > swm auth show ===== SWM Auth Records List===== Index Model Mac ----- ------ -------------1 G2261 00507ff0c33c ================================ Telnet Command: swm extvlan This command is used to configure port VLAN of VigorSwitch. Before using such command, make sure you have configured VLAN settings well. Syntax swm extvlan [LAN_Port][VLAN_idx][Port_Description] Syntax Description Parameter LAN_Port VLAN_idx Port_Description Description Setting range is from 1 to 5.
swm group set [IDX][NAME][0] swm group show swm group add [IDX][MAC] swm group delete [IDX][MAC] Syntax Description Parameter Description IDX NAME PASSWD Type the number to specify the index number of the group profile. Type a name for VigorSwitch group. Specify a password. 1 – Set group name and password. 0 - Set group name without password. Type the MAC address of the VigorSwitch. Add – Make the selected switch (by specifying MAC address) to be grouped as VLAN.
show Enable_all Disable_all MAC Display all the switch devices managed under Vigor router. Enable all of the switch devices. Disable all of the switch devices. Type the MAC address of the VigorSwitch. Example > swm profile show Name IP Address MAC Model Group ---------------- ---------------- -----------P2261 192.168.1.
Telnet Command: swm maintain This command is used to reboot, reset VigorSwitch or display the status of VigorSwitch. Syntax swm maintain reboot [MAC] swm maintain reset [MAC] swm maintain show Syntax Description Parameter Description Reboot [MAC] Reset [MAC] show Type the MAC address of the VigorSwitch that you want to reboot. Type the MAC address of the VigorSwitch that you want to reset.
Telnet Command: swm db This command is used to set corresponding actions (for database) while encountering alert event. Syntax swm db ctl en /dis swm db ctl show swm db alert notify [N/S] swm db alert action [S/B] swm db alert sms [IDX] swm db alert mail [IDX] Syntax Description Parameter Description ctl en / dis It means to enable / disable the database for recording switch management information. It means to display the database control status.
swm alert set [Idx] log [e/d] swm alert set [Idx] name [name] swm alert set [Idx] color [O/R/N] swm alert set [Idx] notif [e/d] swm alert set [Idx] obj [object idx] [object value] swm alert display swm alert en/dis [sw/port] [mac] swm alert sw show [mac] swm alert set sw [mac] [incident idx] [level idx] swm alert port show [mac] swm alert set port [mac] [port num][incident idx] [level idx] Syntax Description Parameter Description enable/disable Enable/disable alert mechanism.
Incident id – Type an index number of the incident. level idx – Available range: 1 – 8. Each number represents different severity level. Example > swm alert set 5 obj 1 > swm alert display Name IP Address Model Sw-Alert Port-Alert ---------------- ---------------- ------ -------- ---------G2260 192.168.1.
show day show week set level [idx] on/off set type [idx] on/off set switch [mac] on/off Display day Log for VigorSwitch. Display week Log for VigorSwitch. Enable / disable the alert with different severity. Idx- Range 1 to 4. 1 means No Alert; 2 means Minor Alert; 3 means Moderate Alert; 4 means Major Alert. On – Enable Off - Disable Enable / disable the Port Alert / Switch Alert. Idx- 1 means Port Alart; 2 means Switch Alert.
Iftbl[MAC][port_num] Type the MAC address and the port number of the VigorSwitch to display SNMP port interface information. Example > swm snmp sys 00507ff0c33c sysDescr:20-Port 10/100/1000Base-T + 4 TP/(100/1G) SFP Combo + 2 (100/1G) SFP Po E+ L2 Plus Managed Switch sysObjectID:1.3.6.1.4.1.5205.2.
Index Analyze, 396 ３ 3G/4G USB Modem, 52 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode), 72, 74 ６ Anonymous, 166 Antenna Installation, 3 AP Discovery, 270 AP Maintenance, 568, 576 AP Map, 568, 577 APN Name, 71, 73, 74 6rd Mode, 85 APP Enforcement, 379 6rd Prefix, 86 APP Enforcement Filter, 401 6rd Prefix Length, 86 APP Enforcement Profile, 402 APP QoS, 485 ８ 802.
Bandwidth Management, 269 Connection Management, 349 Barring Type, 296 Connection Type, 151 Base Distinguished Name / Group Distinguished Name, 168 Connectivity, 51 Beacon Period, 582 Bind IP to MAC, 125 Bind to WAN, 357 Bind Type, 166 Block Anonymous, 298 Block IP Calls, 298 Block Unknown Domain, 298 Country Code, 267 CPE Management, 550 CSM, 401 CSV file, 612, 615 Current System Time, 159 Ｄ Bogus DNS Reply, 157 Dashboard, 24, 569 Bonjour, 175 Data Coding Scheme, 240 Bridge, 262, 265 Data Fil
DHCP, 40 External Devices, 607 DHCP Client Identifier, 67 External RADIUS, 161 DHCP Server Configuration, 107, 109, 111 External TACACS+, 164 DHCP Server IP Address, 107, 109 DHCP Table, 661 DHCPv6 (Stateful), 113 DHCPv6 Server, 114 Diagnose, 158, 217 Diagnostics, 656, 657 Dial-out Triggering, 657 DialPlan, 291 Digit Map, 293 Digital Signature, 313, 328 Display Name, 56, 58, 61 DMZ Host, 138 DNS Cache Table, 663 DNS Filter, 379 DNS Filter Profile, 416 DNS Security, 157 Ｆ Failover, 56, 59 Failover to/
Ｉ Isolate, 255 IAID, 81 ISP Name, 89 ISP Access Setup, 62, 68 ICMP, 346 Idle Timeout, 64, 89, 327 IGMP, 170 Ｋ IGMP Proxy, 170 keep alive, 331 IGMP Snooping, 170 Keep Alive Period, 439 IKE Authentication Method, 335 Keep WAN Connection, 65 IM, 403 Keyword Group, 625 Incoming Port, 145 Keyword Object, 623 Incoming Protocol, 144 Indicators and Connectors, 2, 10 Ｌ Installation, i LAN, 102 Inter-LAN Routing, 106 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding, 146, 154 Internal RADIUS, 162 LAN- General Setup, 1
Long Preamble, 266 Network Interface, 211 Loop through, 292 Network Mode, 73, 74 LTE, 44, 234 Notification Object, 633 LTE hardware version, 75 NS Detect, 81 LTE Status, 243 Ｍ Ｏ Objects Settings, 610 Mail Alert, 174 Online Statistics, 479 Mail Extender, 151 OP Number, 294 Mail Service, 174 Open Ports, 141 Main Screen, 22 Operation Mode, 266 Maintenance, 600 Option Number, 61 Management, 433, 457 Management Interface, 180 Max User Login, 501 Mic Gain, 302 Min/Max Interval Time, 115 Mirro
PPP Authentication, 64, 69, 71, 89 Rate Control, 103 PPP General Setup, 321 Reboot System, 466 PPP Password, 71 Recipient, 173 PPP Setup, 69 Recipient Number, 240 PPP Username, 71 Redundancy Method, 179 PPP/MP Setup, 64 Regional, 297 PPPoE, 34 Registering Vigor Router, 48 PPPoE Pass-through, 63 Regular DN, 167 PPTP, 327 Regular Mode, 166 PPTP/L2TP, 37 Regular Password, 167 Prefer Codec, 289 Relay Agent, 107, 109 Prefix Len, 210 Remote Access Control, 320 Prefix Length, 82 Remote Dia
Security, 256, 373 Specific Hosts, 131 Security Key, 250 Specify Remote Node, 327 Self-signed, 357 SPI, 375 Self-Signed Certificate, 464 SSID, 251 Send SMS, 240 SSL Tunnel, 327 Sensor, 648 SSL VPN, 356 Server Address, 68 Start IP Address, 107, 109, 111 Server Certificate, 357 Start IPv6 Address, 114 Server IP Address, 162 Start Port, 142 Server Response, 151 Static IP, 39 Service, 144 Static Route, 103, 206 Service Activation Wizard, 46 Static Route for IPv6, 210 Service API, 150 St
TCP, 346 User Group, 362, 504 Temperature Sensor, 648 User Management, 496 Time and Date, 454 User Online Status, 505 Time Quota, 502 User Password, 443 Time Schedule, 477 User Profile, 164, 183, 499 Time Server, 454 User-Based, 497 Time Zone, 454 Username, 62, 67, 68, 78, 79, 89 Tone Power Level, 302 UserName, 75 Total Traffic, 584 TR-069, 438 Trace Route, 670 Traceable, 485 Traffic Graph, 580, 668 Traffic Threshold, 56, 59 Trap Community, 456 Triggering Port, 144 Triggering Protocol, 144 T
WAN Budget-Status, 94 WEP, 247, 257 WAN Connection Detection, 63, 66, 71, 73, 75, 76, 78, 80, 81, 82, 84, 86 white/black list, 258 WAN Failure, 56 WAN Inbound Bandwidth, 480 WAN Interface, 136, 141, 150, 152 WAN IP Alias, 64, 67, 69 WAN IP Network Settings, 67, 69 WAN Outbound Bandwidth, 480 WAN Setup, 89 WAN Type, 87, 89, 91 WCF, 2 WDS, 262 Web Console, 28 Web Content Filter, 379, 401 Web Content Filter Profile, 412 Wildcard, 151 Wired 802.
